R20 COURSE STRUCTURE AND SYLLABUS

For
B. Tech.
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING

(Applicable for batches admitted from 2020-21)

PRAGATI ENGINEERING COLLEGE

(AUTONOMOUS)
Permanently Affiliated to JNTUK, Kakinada, Accredited by NAAC with “A” Grade Recognized by
UGC 2(f) and 12(b) under UGC act, 1956

# 1-378, ADB Road, Surampalem – 533 437 Near Peddapuram, E.G.Dist, Andhra Pradesh
 PRAGATI ENGINEERING COLLEGE
1-378, ADB Road, Surampalem-533437
(Approved by AICTE, Permanently Affiliated to JNTUK, KAKINADA

Institute Vision and Mission

Vision
To emerge as a Premier Institution for Technical Education in the Country through Academic
Excellence and to be recognized as a Centre for Excellence in Research & Development,
catering to the needs of our Country.
Mission
To realize a strong Institution by consistently maintaining State – of – Art – infrastructure,
build a cohesive, World Class Team and provide need based Technical Education, Research
and Development through enhanced Industry Interaction

Vision and Mission of the Department

Vision
To be an acknowledged Leader in providing quality education, training and research in area of
Electronics and Communication Engineering to meet the industrial and Societal needs.

Mission
 M1: To facilitate students with a state-of-the-art infrastructure, learning environment and
value-based education to improve technical knowledge and skills for continuous learning
process.
 M2: To impart high quality education with well qualified faculty and enable students to
meet the challenges of the industry at global level
 M3: To promote innovation and active industry institute interaction by facilitating the
students to improve their leadership and entrepreneurship skills with ethical values.

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 2

 PRAGATI ENGINEERING COLLEGE
1-378, ADB Road, Surampalem-533437
(Approved by AICTE, Permanently Affiliated to JNTUK, KAKINADA

POs Program Outcomes

PO1 Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals
and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems
PO2 Problem Analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences,
and engineering sciences.
PO3 Design / Development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design
system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the
public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with
an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
PO7 Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions
in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development.
PO8 Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of
the engineering practice.
PO9 Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual and as a member or leader in
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO10 Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports
and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11 Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering
management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12 Life-long learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and lifelong learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PSOs Program Specific Outcomes
PSO1 Ability to apply concepts in electronics and communication engineering, to design and implement
complex systems in the areas related to analog and digital electronics , communication, signal
processing ,VLSI& ES
PSO2 Ability to provide discerning solutions based on their expertise in electronics and communication
courses in competitive examinations for successful employment, higher studies and research.

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 3

 AUTONOMOUS COLLEGES OF JNTUK
COMMON ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (R20) FOR B. TECH PROGRAMME
(Applicable for from the Academic Year 2020-21)

1. Award of B. Tech. Degree

(a) A student will be declared eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree if he fulfils the
following academic regulations:
(i) A student shall be declared eligible for the award of B. Tech Degree, if he pursues a
course of study in not less than four and not more than eight academic years. After eight
academic years from the year of their admission, he/she shall forfeit their seat in B.
Tech course and their admission stands cancelled.
(ii) The candidate shall register for 160 credits and secure all the 160 credits.
(b) The medium of instruction for the entire under graduate programme in Engineering &
Technology will be in English only.

2. Programme Pattern:
a) Total duration of the of B. Tech (Regular) Programme is four academic years
b) Each Academic year of study is divided into Two Semesters.
c) Minimum number of instruction days in each semester is 90.
d) Grade points, based on percentage of marks awarded for each course will form the basis for
calculation of SGPA (Semester Grade Point Average) and CGPA (Cumulative Grade Point
Average).
e) The total credits for the Programme is 160.
f) Three week induction program is mandatory for all first year UG students and shall be conducted as
per AICTE/UGC/APSCHE guidelines.
g) Student is introduced to “Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)”.
h) A pool of interdisciplinary and job-oriented mandatory skill courses which are relevant to the
industry are integrated into the curriculum of concerned branch of engineering (total five skill
courses: two basic level skill courses, one on soft skills and other two on advanced level skill
courses)
i) A student has to register for all courses in a semester.
j) All the registered credits will be considered for the calculation of final CGPA.
k) Each semester has - ‘Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)’ and ‘Semester End Examination (SEE)’.
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) and Credit Based Semester System (CBSS) as indicated by
UGC and course structure as suggested by AICTE are followed.
l) A 10 months industry/field mandatory internship, both industry and social, during the summer
vacation and also in the final semester to acquire the skills required for job and make engineering
graduates to connect with the needs of the industry and society at large.
m) All the students shall be mandatorily registered for NCC, NSS activities and Community Service
Project as per the Government and University norms.
n) Each college shall assign a faculty advisor/mentor after admission to each student or group of
students from same department to provide guidance in courses registration/career
growth/placements/opportunities for higher studies/GATE/other competitive exams etc.

3. Registration for Courses:

a) In each semester a student shall mandatorily register courses which he/she wishes to pursue within a
week from the starting of the class work with the advice of Head of the Department and mentor of
the student of the concerned department of the college.
b) If any student wishes to withdraw the registration of the course, he/she shall submit a letter to the
Principal of the college through the Head of the Department and mentor within fifteen days.
 c) The concerned college shall thoroughly verify and upload the data/courses registered by each student
in the university examination center within 20 days. The Principal of the concerned college shall
ensure that there no wrong registration courses by the student. The university registration portal will
be closed after 20 days.

4. (a) Award of B. Tech. Degree: A student will be declared eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree if
he fulfills the following academic regulations:
i. A student shall be declared eligible for award of the B. Tech Degree, if he pursues a course of study
in not less than four and not more than eight academic years. After eight academic years from the
year of their admission, he/she shall forfeit their seat in B. Tech course and their admission stands
cancelled.
ii. The student shall register for 160 credits and must secure all the 160 credits.
iii. All students shall mandatorily register for the courses like Environmental Sciences, Universal
Human Values, Ethics, Indian Constitution, Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge etc., shall be
included in the curriculum as non-credit mandatory courses. Environmental Sciences is to be offered
compulsorily as mandatory course for all branches. A student has to secure at least 40% of the marks
allotted in the internal evaluation for passing the course and shall maintain 75% of attendance in the
subject.
iv. All students shall mandatorily register for NCC/NSS activities and will be required to participate in
an activity specified by NSS officer during second and third semesters. Grade shall be awarded as
Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory in the mark sheet on the basis of participation, attendance,
performance and behavior. If a student gets an unsatisfactory Grade, he/she shall repeat the above
activity in the subsequent years, in order to complete the degree requirements.
v. Credits are defined as per AICTE norms.
(b) Award of B. Tech. (Honor)/B. Tech. (Minor): B. Tech. with Honors or a B. Tech. with a Minor will
be awarded if the student earns 20 additional credits are acquired as per the regulations/guidelines.
The regulations/guidelines are separately provided. Registering for an Honors/Minor is optional.
5. Attendance Requirements
a) A student is eligible to write the University examinations if he acquires a minimum of 40% in each
subject and 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above, and below 75%)
may be granted by the College Academic Committee. However, this condonation concession is
applicable only to any two semesters during the entire programme.
c) Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall not be condoned.
d) A student who is short of attendance in a semester may seek re-admission into that semester when
offered within 4 weeks from the date of commencement of class work.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to write their
end semester examination of that class.
f) A stipulated fee of Rs. 500/- in the concerned semester shall be payable towards condonation of
shortage of attendance. Students availing condonation on medical ground shall produce a medical
certificate issued by the competitive authority.
g) A student will be promoted to the next semester if he satisfies the (i) attendance requirement of the
present semester and (ii) minimum required credits.
h) If any candidate fulfills the attendance requirement in the present semester, he shall not be eligible
for readmission into the same class.
i) For induction programme attendance shall be maintained as per AICTE norms.
j) For non-credit mandatory courses the students shall maintain the attendance similar to credit courses

6. Evaluation-Distribution and Weightage of marks

(i) Paper setting and evaluation of the answer scripts shall be done as per the procedures laid down by
the University Examination section from time to time.
(ii) To maintain the quality, external examiners and question paper setters shall be selected from reputed
institutes like IISc, IITs, IIITs, IISERs, NITs and Universities.
(iii) For non-credit mandatory courses, like Environmental Sciences, Universal Human Values, Ethics,
Indian Constitution, Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge, the student has to secure 40% of the
 marks allotted in the internal evaluation for passing the course. No marks or letter grade shall be
allotted for all mandatory non-credit courses.
(iv) A student is deemed to have satisfied the minimum academic requirements if he has earned the
credits allotted to each theory/practical design/drawing subject/ project etc by securing not less than
35% of marks in the end semester exam and minimum 40% of marks in the sum total of the internal
marks and end semester examination marks together.
(v) Distribution and Weightage of marks:
The assessment of the student’s performance in each course will be as per the details given:
S. No Components Internal External Total
1 Theory 30 70 100
2 Engineering Graphics/Design/Drawing 30 70 100
3 Practical 15 35 50
4 Mini Project/Internship/Industrial Training/ Skill - 50 50
Development programmes/Research Project
5 Project Work 60 140 200
(vi) Continuous Internal Theory Evaluation:
a) For theory subjects, during a semester, there shall be two mid-term examinations. Each mid-term
examination consists of (i) one online objective examination (20 multiple choice questions) for 10
marks for a duration of 20 minutes (ii) one descriptive examination (3 full questions for 5 marks
each) for 15 marks for a duration of 90 minutes and (iii) one assignment for marks. All the
internal exams shall be conducted as per university norms from first 50% of the syllabi.
b) In the similar lines, the second online, descriptive examinations assignment shall be conducted on
the rest of the 50% syllabus.
c) The total marks secured by the student in each mid-term examination are evaluated for 30 marks.
The first mid marks (Mid-1) consisting of marks of online objective examination, descriptive
examination and assignment shall be submitted to the University examination section within one
week after completion of first mid examination.
d) The mid marks submitted to the University examination section shall be displayed in the
concerned college notice boards for the benefit of the students.
e) If any discrepancy found in the submitted Mid-1 marks, it shall be brought to the notice of
university examination section within one week from the submission.
f) Second mid marks (Mid-2) consisting of marks of online objective examination, descriptive
examination and assignment shall also be submitted to University examination section within one
week after completion of second mid examination and it shall be displayed in the notice boards. If
any discrepancy found in the submitted mid-2 marks, it shall be brought to the notice of
university examination section within one week from the submission.
g) Internal marks can be calculated with 80% weightage for better of the two mids and 20%
Weightage for other mid exam.
Example:
Mid-1 marks = Marks secured in (online examination-1+descriptive examination-1
+one assignment-1)
Mid-2 marks = Marks secured in (online examination-2+descriptive examination-2
+one assignment-2)
Final internal Marks = (Best of (Mid-1/Mid-2) marks x 0.8
+ Least of (Mid-1/Mid-2) marks x 0.2)
h) With the above criteria, university examination section will send mid marks of all subjects in
consolidated form to all the concerned colleges and same shall be displayed in the concerned
college notice boards. If any discrepancy found, it shall be brought to the notice of university
examination section through proper channel within one week with all proofs. Discrepancies
brought after the given deadline will not be entertained under any circumstances.
(vii) Semester End Theory Examinations Evaluation:
a) The semester end examinations will be conducted university examination section for 70 marks
consists of five questions carrying 14 marks each. Each of these questions is from one unit and
may contain sub-questions. For each question there will be an “either” “or” choice, which means
that there will be two questions from each unit and the student should answer either of the two
questions.
b) For practical subjects there shall be continuous evaluation during the semester for 15 internal
marks and 35 end examination marks. The internal 15 marks shall be awarded as follows: day to
day work - 5 marks, Record-5 marks and the remaining 5 marks to be awarded by conducting an
internal laboratory test. The end examination shall be conducted by the teacher concerned and
external examiner appointed.
c) For the subject having design and / or drawing, (such as Engineering Graphics, Engineering
Drawing, Machine Drawing) and estimation, the distribution shall be 30 marks for internal
evaluation (15 marks for continuous Assessment (day–to–day work) and 15 marks for internal
tests) and 70 marks for end examination. There shall be two internal tests in a Semester for 15
marks each and final marks can be calculated with 80% weightage for better of the two tests and
20% weightage for other test and these are to be added to the marks obtained in day to day work.
d) Evaluation of the summer internships: It shall be completed in collaboration with local industries,
Govt. Organizations, construction agencies, Industries, Hydel and thermal power projects and
also in software MNCs in the area of concerned specialization of the UG programme. Students
shall pursue this course during summer vacation just before its offering as per course structure.
The minimum duration of this course is at least 6 weeks. The student shall register for the course
as per course structure after commencement of academic year. A supervisor/mentor/advisor has
to be allotted to guide the students for taking up the summer internship. The supervisor shall
monitor the attendance of the students while taking up the internship. Attendance requirements
are as per the norms of the University. After successful completion, students shall submit a
summer internship technical report to the concerned department and appear for an oral
presentation before the departmental committee consists of an external examiner; Head of the
Department; supervisor of the internship and a senior faculty member of the department. A
certificate from industry/skill development center shall be included in the report. The report and
the oral presentation shall carry 40% and 60% weightages respectively. It shall be evaluated for
50 external marks at the end of the semester. There shall be no internal marks for Summer
Internship. A student shall secure minimum 40% of marks for successful completion. In case, if a
student fails, he/she shall reappear as and when semester supplementary examinations are
conducted by the University.
e) The job oriented skill courses may be registered at the college or at any accredited external
agency. A student shall submit a record/report on the on the list skills learned. If the student
completes job oriented skill course at external agency, a certificate from the agency shall be
included in the report. The course will be evaluated at the end of the semester for 50 marks
(record: 15 marks and viva-voce: 35 marks) along with laboratory end examinations in the
presence of external and internal examiner (course instructor or mentor). There are no internal
marks for the job oriented skill courses.
f) Mandatory Course (M.C): Environmental Sciences, Universal Human Values, Ethics, Indian
Constitution, Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge etc non-credit (zero credits) mandatory
courses. Environmental Sciences shall be offered compulsorily as mandatory course for all
branches. A minimum of 75% attendance is mandatory in these subjects. There shall be an
external examination for 70 marks and it shall be conducted by the college internally. Two
internal examinations shall be conducted for 30 marks and a student has to secure at least 40% of
the marks for passing the course. There is no online internal exam for mandatory courses. No marks or
letter grade shall be printed in the transcripts for all mandatory non-credit courses, but only
Completed (Y)/Not-completed (N) will be specified.
g) Procedure for Conduct and Evaluation of MOOC: There shall be a Discipline Centric Elective
Course through Massive Open Online Course (MOOC) as Program Elective course. The student
shall register for the course (Minimum of 12 weeks) offered by SWAYAM/NPTEL through
online with the approval of Head of the Department. The Head of the Department shall appoint
 one mentor for each of the MOOC subjects offered. The student needs to register the course in the
SWAYAM/NPTEL portal. During the course, the mentor monitors the student’s assignment
submissions given by SWAYAM/NPTEL. The student needs to submit all the assignments given
and needs to take final exam at the proctor center. The student needs to earn a certificate by
passing the exam. The student will be awarded the credits given in curriculum only by submission
of the certificate. In case if student does not pass subjects registered through SWAYAM/NPTEL,
the same or alternative equivalent subject may be registered again through SWAYAM/NPTEL in
the next semester with the recommendation of HOD and shall be pass.
h) Major Project (Project - Project work, seminar and internship in industry):
In the final semester, the student should mandatorily register and undergo internship and in parallel
he/she should work on a project with well-defined objectives. At the end of the semester the
candidate shall submit an internship completion certificate and a project report. A student shall
also be permitted to submit project report on the work carried out during the internship. The
project report shall be evaluated with an external examiner.
Evaluation: The total marks for project work 200 marks and distribution shall be 60 marks for
internal and 140 marks for external evaluation. The supervisor assesses the student for 30 marks
(Report: 15 marks, Seminar: 15 marks). At the end of the semester, all projects shall be
showcased at the department for the benefit of all students and staff and the same is to be
evaluated by the departmental Project Review Committee consisting of supervisor, a senior
faculty and HOD for 30 marks. The external evaluation of Project Work is a Viva-Voce
Examination conducted in the presence of internal examiner and external examiner and is
evaluated for 140 marks.
7. Results Declaration:
(i) Before results declaration, an academic council meeting shall be conducted and results shall be placed
before the academic council for approval.
(ii) With the approval of academic council, the results shall be submitted to the University to get the
approval from Honorable Vice-Chancellor.
(iii) The University may normalize the result, if required, before declaration of the result (Guidelines for
normalization will be provided separately)
(iv) A copy of approved results in a CD shall be submitted to the University examination Center.
8. Academic Audit: Academic audit in each semester will be conducted as per norms.
9. Recounting or Re-evaluation of Marks in the End Semester Examination: A student can request for
recounting of revaluation of his/her answer book on payment of a prescribed fee as per university norms.
10. Supplementary Examinations: A student who has failed to secure the required credits can appear for a
supplementary examination, as per the schedule announced by the University.
11. Malpractices in Examinations: Disciplinary action shall be taken in case of malpractices during Mid/End
examinations as per the rules framed by the University.
12. Promotion Rules
The following academic requirements have to be satisfied in addition to the attendance requirements
mentioned in item no.5 for promotion to higher classes
a) A student shall be promoted from first year to second year if he fulfills the minimum attendance
requirement as per University norm.
b) A student will be promoted from II year to III year if he fulfills the academic requirement of 40% of
credits up to either II year I-Semester or II year II-Semester from all the examinations, whether or
not the candidate takes the examinations and secures prescribed minimum attendance in II year II
semester.
c) A student shall be promoted from III year to IV year if he fulfills the academic requirements of 40%
of the credits up to either III year I semester or III year II semester from all the examinations,
whether or not the candidate takes the examinations and secures prescribed minimum attendance in
III year II semester.
13. Course Pattern
a) The entire course of study is for four academic years; all years are on semester pattern.
 b) A student eligible to appear for the end semester examination in a subject, but absent from it or has
failed in the end semester examination, may write the exam in that subject when conducted next.
c) When a student is detained for lack of credits / shortage of attendance, he may be re-admitted into
the same semester/year in which he has been detained. However, the academic regulations under
which he was first admitted shall continue to be applicable to him.
14. Earning of Credit:
A student shall be considered to have completed a course successfully and earned the credits if he/she
secures an acceptable letter grade in the range A+ to E as given below. Letter grade ‘F’ in any course
implies failure of the student in that course and no credits earned. Absent is also treated as no credits
earned. For project same % percentages will be followed for grading.
Marks Range Theory Marks Range Lab Letter Grade
Level
(Max – 100) (Max – 50) Grade Point
≥ 90 ≥ 45 Outstanding A+ 10
≥80 to <89 ≥40 to <44 Excellent A 9
≥70 to <79 ≥35 to <39 Very Good B 8
≥60 to <69 ≥30 to <34 Good C 7
≥50 to <59 ≥25 to <29 Fair D 6
≥40 to <49 ≥20 to <24 Satisfactory E 5
<40 <20 Fail F 0
- Absent AB 0
15. Award of Class
After a student has satisfied the requirements prescribed for the completion of the program and is
eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree, he shall be placed in one of the following four classes:
Class Awarded CGPA to be secured Remarks
≥ 7.75
First Class with Distinction (Without any supplementary appearance) From the
First Class ≥ 6.75 CGPA
secured
Second Class ≥ 5.75 to < 6.75 from
Pass Class ≥ 5.00 to < 5.75 160 Credits

16. Minimum Instruction Days

The minimum instruction days for each semester shall be 90 working days. There shall be no branch
transfers after the completion of the admission process. There shall be no transfer from one
college/stream to another within the Constituent Colleges and Units of Jawaharlal Nehru Technological
University Kakinada.
17. Withholding of Results
If the student is involved in indiscipline/malpractices/court cases, the result of the student will be
withheld.
18. Transitory Regulations
a) Discontinued or detained candidates are eligible for re-admission as and when next offered.
b) The re-admitted candidate will be governed by the rules & regulations under which the candidate has
been admitted.
c) (i) In case of transferred students from other Universities, credits shall be transferred to JNTUK as
per the academic regulations and course structure of JNTUK.
d) The students seeking transfer to colleges affiliated to JNTUK from various other Universities /
Institutions have to obtain the credits of any equivalent subjects as prescribed by JNTUK. In
addition, the transferred candidates have to pass the failed subjects at the earlier Institute with
already obtained internal/sessional marks to be conducted by JNTUK.
19. Gap - Year
 Gap Year concept of Student Entrepreneur in Residence shall be introduced and outstanding students
who wish to pursue entrepreneurship are allowed to take a break of one year at any time after I/II/III year
to pursue entrepreneurship full time. This period shall be counted for the maximum time for graduation.
An evaluation committee at university level shall be constituted to evaluate the proposal submitted by the
student and the committee shall decide on permitting the student for availing the Gap Year.
20. General
a) Wherever the words “he”, “him”, “his”, occur in the regulations, they include “she”, “her”, “hers”.
b) The academic regulation should be read as a whole for the purpose of any interpretation.
c) In case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the Vice-
Chancellor is final.
d) The University may change or amend the academic regulations or syllabi at any time and the
changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students with effect from the dates
notified by the University.

***
 ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (R19) FOR B. TECH. (LATERAL ENTRY SCHEME)
Applicable for the students admitted into II year B. Tech. from the Academic Year 2020-21 onwards
1 Award of B. Tech. Degree
A student will be declared eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree if he fulfills the following
academic regulations:
a) A student shall be declared eligible for the award of the B. Tech Degree, if he pursues a
course of study in not less than three academic years and not more than six academic years.
After six academic years from the year of their admission, he/she shall forfeit their seat in
B. Tech course and their admission stands cancelled.
b) The candidate shall register for 121 credits and secure all the 121 credits.

2. The attendance regulations of B. Tech. (Regular) shall be applicable to B.Tech (lateral

entry).

3. Promotion Rules
A student shall be promoted from second year to third year if he fulfills the minimum
attendance requirement.
A student shall be promoted from III year to IV year if he fulfills the academic requirements
of 40% of the credits up to either III year I semester or III year II semester from all the
examinations, whether or not the candidate takes the examinations and secures prescribed
minimum attendance in III year II semester.

4. Award of Class
After a student has satisfied the requirement prescribed for the completion of the program
and is eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree, he shall be placed in one of the following
four classes:
Class Awarded CGPA to be secured Remarks
First Class with Distinction ≥ 7.75 From the
(Without any supplementary appearance) CGPA
First Class ≥ 6.75 secured from
121 Credits
Second Class ≥ 5.75 to < 6.75
from II Year to
Pass Class ≥ 5.00 to < 5.75 IV Year
The Grades secured, Grade points and Credits obtained will be shown separately in the
memorandum of marks.
5. All the other regulations as applicable to B. Tech. 4-year degree course (Regular) will
hold good for B. Tech. (Lateral Entry Scheme)
 COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT
Introduction
1. Community Service Project is an experiential learning strategy that integrates meaningful
community service with instruction, participation, learning and community development
2. Community Service Project involves students in community development and service activities and
applies the experience to personal and academic development.
3. Community Service Project is meant to link the community with the college for mutual benefit. The
community will be benefited with the focused contribution of the college students for the village/
local development. The college finds an opportunity to develop social sensibility and responsibility
among students and also emerge as a socially responsible institution.
Objective
Community Service Project should be an integral part of the curriculum, as an alternative to the 2
months of Summer Internships / Apprenticeships / On the Job Training, whenever there is an exigency
when students cannot pursue their summer internships. The specific objectives are;
1. To sensitize the students to the living conditions of the people who are around them,
2. To help students to realize the stark realities of the society.
3. To bring about an attitudinal change in the students and help them to develop societal consciousness,
sensibility, responsibility and accountability
4. To make students aware of their inner strength and help them to find new /out of box solutions to the
social problems.
5. To make students socially responsible citizens who are sensitive to the needs of the disadvantaged
sections.
6. To help students to initiate developmental activities in the community in coordination with public and
government authorities.
7. To develop a holistic life perspective among the students by making them study culture, traditions,
habits, lifestyles, resource utilization, wastages and its management, social problems, public
administration system and the roles and responsibilities of different persons across different social
systems.
Implementation of Community Service Project
1. Every student should put in a minimum of 180 hours for the Community Service Project during
the summer vacation.
2. Each class/section should be assigned with a mentor.
3. Specific Departments could concentrate on their major areas of concern. For example, Dept. of
Computer Science can take up activities related to Computer Literacy to different sections of people
like - youth, women, house-wives, etc
4. A log book has to be maintained by each of the student, where the activities undertaken/involved to
be recorded.
5. The log book has to be countersigned by the concerned mentor/faculty in charge.
6. Evaluation to be done based on the active participation of the student and grade could be awarded
by the mentor/faculty member.
7. The final evaluation to be reflected in the grade memo of the student.
8. The Community Service Project should be different from the regular programmes of
NSS/NCC/Green Corps/Red Ribbon Club, etc.
9. Minor project report should be submitted by each student. An internal Viva shall also be conducted
by a committee constituted by the principal of the college.
10. Award of marks shall be made as per the guidelines of Internship/apprentice/ on the job training
Procedure
1. A group of students or even a single student could be assigned for a particular habitation or village
or municipal ward, as far as possible, in the near vicinity of their place of stay, so as to enable them
to commute from their residence and return back by evening or so.
2. The Community Service Project is a twofold one –
a) First, the student/s could conduct a survey of the habitation, if necessary, in terms of their own
domain or subject area. Or it can even be a general survey, incorporating all the different areas.
A common survey format could be designed. This should not be viewed as a duplication of
work by the Village or Ward volunteers, rather, it could be another primary source of data.
b) Secondly, the student/s could take up a social activity, concerning their domain or subject area.
The different areas, could be like –

▪ Agriculture
▪ Health
▪ Marketing and Cooperation
▪ Animal Husbandry
▪ Horticulture
▪ Fisheries
▪ Sericulture
▪ Revenue and Survey
▪ Natural Disaster Management
▪ Irrigation
▪ Law & Order
▪ Excise and Prohibition
▪ Mines and Geology
▪ Energy
▪ Internet
▪ Free Electricity
▪ Drinking Water

EXPECTED OUTCOMES
BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO STUDENTS
Learning Outcomes
1. Positive impact on students’ academic learning
2. Improves students’ ability to apply what they have learned in “the real world”
3. Positive impact on academic outcomes such as demonstrated complexity of understanding,
problem analysis, problem-solving, critical thinking, and cognitive development
4. Improved ability to understand complexity and ambiguity
Personal Outcomes
1. Greater sense of personal efficacy, personal identity, spiritual growth, and moral development
2. Greater interpersonal development, particularly the ability to work well with others, and build
leadership and communication skills
Social Outcomes
1. Reduced stereotypes and greater inter-cultural understanding
2. Improved social responsibility and citizenship skills
3. Greater involvement in community service after graduation
Career Development
1. Connections with professionals and community members for learning and career opportunities
2. Greater academic learning, leadership skills, and personal efficacy can lead to greater
opportunity
Relationship with the Institution
1. Stronger relationships with faculty
2. Greater satisfaction with college
3. Improved graduation rates
BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO FACULTY MEMBERS
1. Satisfaction with the quality of student learning
2. New avenues for research and publication via new relationships between faculty and community
3. Providing networking opportunities with engaged faculty in other disciplines or institutions
4. A stronger commitment to one’s research
BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO COLLEGES AND UNIVERSITIES
1. Improved institutional commitment
2. Improved student retention
3. Enhanced community relations
BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO COMMUNITY
1. Satisfaction with student participation
2. Valuable human resources needed to achieve community goals
3. New energy, enthusiasm and perspectives applied to community work
4. Enhanced community-university relations.
SUGGESTIVE LIST OF PROGRAMMES UNDER COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT
The following the recommended list of projects for Engineering students. The lists are not exhaustive
and open for additions, deletions and modifications. Colleges are expected to focus on specific local
issues for this kind of projects. The students are expected to carry out these projects with
involvement, commitment, responsibility and accountability. The mentors of a group of students
should take the responsibility of motivating, facilitating, and guiding the students. They have to
interact with local leadership and people and appraise the objectives and benefits of this kind of
projects. The project reports shall be placed in the college website for reference. Systematic, Factual,
methodical and honest reporting shall be ensured.
For Engineering Students
1. Water facilities and drinking water availability
2. Health and hygiene
3. Stress levels and coping mechanisms
4. Health intervention programmes
5. Horticulture
6. Herbal plants
7. Botanical survey
8. Zoological survey
9. Marine products
10. Aqua culture
11. Inland fisheries
12. Animals and species
13. Nutrition
14. Traditional health care methods
15. Food habits
16. Air pollution
17. Water pollution
18. Plantation
19. Soil protection
20. Renewable energy
21. Plant diseases
22. Yoga awareness and practice
23. Health care awareness programmes and their impact
24. Use of chemicals on fruits and vegetables
25. Organic farming
26. Crop rotation
27. Floury culture
28. Access to safe drinking water
 29. Geographical survey
30. Geological survey
31. Sericulture
32. Study of species
33. Food adulteration
34. Incidence of Diabetes and other chronic diseases
35. Human genetics
36. Blood groups and blood levels
37. Internet Usage in Villages
38. Android Phone usage by different people
39. Utilization of free electricity to farmers and related issues
40. Gender ration in schooling level- observation.
Complimenting the community service project, the students may be involved to take up some
awareness campaigns on social issues/special groups. The suggested list of programmes are;
Programmes for School Children
1. Reading Skill Programme (Reading Competition)
2. Preparation of Study Materials for the next class.
3. Personality / Leadership Development
4. Career Guidance for X class students
5. Screening Documentary and other educational films
6. Awareness Programme on Good Touch and Bad Touch (Sexual abuse)
7. Awareness Programme on Socially relevant themes.
Programmes for Women Empowerment
1. Government Guidelines and Policy Guidelines
2. Womens’ Rights
3. Domestic Violence
4. Prevention and Control of Cancer
5. Promotion of Social Entrepreneurship
General Camps
1. General Medical camps
2. Eye Camps
3. Dental Camps
4. Importance of protected drinking water
5. ODF awareness camp
6. Swatch Bharat
7. AIDS awareness camp
8. Anti Plastic Awareness
9. Programmes on Environment
10. Health and Hygiene
11. Hand wash programmes
12. Commemoration and Celebration of important days
Programmes for Youth Empowerment
1. Leadership
2. Anti-alcoholism and Drug addiction
3. Anti-tobacco
4. Awareness on Competitive Examinations
5. Personality Development
Common Programmes
1. Awareness on RTI
2. Health intervention programmes
3. Yoga
 4. Tree plantation
5. Programmes in consonance with the Govt. Departments like –
i. Agriculture
ii. Health
iii. Marketing and Cooperation
iv. Animal Husbandry
v. Horticulture
vi. Fisheries
vii. Sericulture
viii. Revenue and Survey
ix. Natural Disaster Management
x. Irrigation
xi. Law & Order
xii. Excise and Prohibition
xiii. Mines and Geology
xiv. Energy
Role of Students:
1. Students may not have the expertise to conduct all the programmes on their own. The students then
can play a facilitator role.
2. For conducting special camps like Health related, they will be coordinating with the Governmental
agencies.
3. As and when required the College faculty themselves act as Resource Persons.
4. Students can work in close association with Non-Governmental Organizations like Lions Club,
Rotary Club, etc or with any NGO actively working in that habitation.
5. And also, with the Governmental Departments. If the programme is rolled out, the District
Administration could be roped in for the successful deployment of the programme.
6. An in-house training and induction programme could be arranged for the faculty and participating
students, to expose them to the methodology of Service Learning.

Timeline for the Community Service Project Activity

Duration: 8 weeks
1. Preliminary Survey (One Week)
a) A preliminary survey including the socio-economic conditions of the allotted habitation to be
conducted.
b) A survey form based on the type of habitation to be prepared before visiting the habitation with
the help of social sciences faculty. (However, a template could be designed for different
habitations, rural/urban.
c) The Governmental agencies, like revenue administration, corporation and municipal authorities
and village secretariats could be aligned for the survey.
2. Community Awareness Campaigns (Two Weeks)
Based on the survey and the specific requirements of the habitation, different awareness
campaigns and programmes to be conducted, spread over two weeks of time. The list of activities
suggested could be taken into consideration.
3. Community Immersion Programme (Four Weeks)
Along with the Community Awareness Programmes, the student batch can also work with any
one of the below listed governmental agencies and work in tandem with them. This community
involvement programme will involve the students in exposing themselves to the experiential
learning about the community and its dynamics. Programmes could be in consonance with the
Govt. Departments.
4. Community Exit Report (One Week)
During the last week of the Community Service Project, a detailed report of the outcome of the 8
weeks works to be drafted and a copy shall be submitted to the local administration. This report
will be a basis for the next batch of students visiting that particular habitation. The same report
submitted to the teacher-mentor will be evaluated by the mentor and suitable marks are awarded
for onward submission to the University.
Throughout the Community Service Project, a daily log-book need to be maintained by the
students batch, which should be countersigned by the governmental agency representative and the
teacher-mentor, who is required to periodically visit the students and guide them.
 MALPRACTICES RULES
DISCIPLINARY ACTION FOR / IMPROPER CONDUCT IN EXAMINATIONS
Nature of Malpractices/Improper conduct Punishment
If the candidate:
Possesses or keeps accessible in examination hall, Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of the
any paper, note book, programmable calculators, Cell performance in that subject only.
phones, pager, palm computers or any other form of
material concerned with or related to the subject of
1. (a) the examination (theory or practical) in which he is
appearing but has not made use of (material shall
include any marks on the body of the candidate
which can be used as an aid in the subject of the
examination)
Gives assistance or guidance or receives it from any Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of the
other candidate orally or by any other body language performance in that subject only of all the candidates involved.
(b) methods or communicates through cell phones with In case of an outsider, he will be handed over to the police and
any candidate or persons in or outside the exam hall a case is registered against him.
in respect of any matter.
Has copied in the examination hall from any paper, Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of the
book, programmable calculators, palm computers or performance in that subject and all other subjects the candidate
any other form of material relevant to the subject of has already appeared including practical examinations and
2. the examination (theory or practical) in which the project work and shall not be permitted to appear for the
candidate is appearing. remaining examinations of the subjects of that Semester/year.
The Hall Ticket of the candidate is to be cancelled and sent to
the University.
Impersonates any other candidate in connection with The candidate who has impersonated shall be expelled from
the examination. examination hall. The candidate is also debarred and forfeits
the seat. The performance of the original candidate who has
been impersonated, shall be cancelled in all the subjects of the
examination (including practicals and project work) already
appeared and shall not be allowed to appear for examinations
3. of the remaining subjects of that semester/year. The candidate
is also debarred for two consecutive semesters from class work
and all University examinations. The continuation of the
course by the candidate is subject to the academic regulations
in connection with forfeiture of seat. If the imposter is an
outsider, he will be handed over to the police and a case is
registered against him.
Smuggles in the Answer book or additional sheet or Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of
4.
takes out or arranges to send out the question paper performance in that subject and all the other subjects the
during the examination or answer book or additional candidate has already appeared including practical
sheet, during or after the examination. examinations and project work and shall not be permitted for
the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred for two
consecutive semesters from class work and all University
examinations. The continuation of the course by the candidate
is subject to the academic regulations in connection with
forfeiture of seat.
Uses objectionable, abusive or offensive language in Cancellation of the performance in that subject.
the answer paper or in letters to the examiners or
5.
writes to the examiner requesting him to award pass
marks.
Refuses to obey the orders of the Chief In case of students of the college, they shall be expelled from
Superintendent/Assistant – Superintendent / any examination halls and cancellation of their performance in that
officer on duty or misbehaves or creates disturbance subject and all other subjects the candidate(s) has (have)
of any kind in and around the examination hall or already appeared and shall not be permitted to appear for the
organizes a walk out or instigates others to walk out, remaining examinations of the subjects of that semester/year.
or threatens the officer-in charge or any person on The candidates also are debarred and forfeit their seats. In case
duty in or outside the examination hall of any injury of outsiders, they will be handed over to the police and a police
to his person or to any of his relations whether by case is registered against them.
6.
words, either spoken or written or by signs or by
visible representation, assaults the officer-in-charge,
or any person on duty in or outside the examination
hall or any of his relations, or indulges in any other
act of misconduct or mischief which result in damage
to or destruction of property in the examination hall
or any part of the College campus or engages in any
other act which in the opinion of the officer on duty
 amounts to use of unfair means or misconduct or has
the tendency to disrupt the orderly conduct of the
examination.

Leaves the exam hall taking away answer script or Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of
intentionally tears the script or any part thereof inside performance in that subject and all the other subjects the
or outside the examination hall. candidate has already appeared including practical
examinations and project work and shall not be permitted for
the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
7.
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred for two
consecutive semesters from class work and all University
examinations. The continuation of the course by the candidate
is subject to the academic regulations in connection with
forfeiture of seat.
Possess any lethal weapon or firearm in the Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of the
examination hall. performance in that subject and all other subjects the candidate
has already appeared including practical examinations and
8.
project work and shall not be permitted for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of that semester/year. The
candidate is also debarred and forfeits the seat.
If student of the college, who is not a candidate for Student of the colleges expulsion from the examination hall
the particular examination or any person not and cancellation of the performance in that subject and all
connected with the college indulges in any other subjects the candidate has already appeared including
malpractice or improper conduct mentioned in clause practical examinations and project work and shall not be
6 to 8. permitted for the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
9.
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred and forfeits the
seat.
Person(s) who do not belong to the College will be
handed over to police and, a police case will be registered
against them.
Comes in a drunken condition to the examination Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of the
hall. performance in that subject and all other subjects the candidate
10. has already appeared including practical examinations and
project work and shall not be permitted for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of that semester/year.
Copying detected on the basis of internal evidence, Cancellation of the performance in that subject and all other
such as, during valuation or during special scrutiny. subjects the candidate has appeared including practical
11.
examinations and project work of that semester/year
examinations.
If any malpractice is detected which is not covered in
the above clauses 1 to 11 shall be reported to the
12.
University for further action and impose suitable
punishment.

Malpractices identified by squad or special invigilators

1. Punishments to the candidates as per the above guidelines.
2. Punishment for institutions: (if the squad reports that the college is also involved in encouraging malpractices)
(i) A show because notice shall be issued to the college.
(ii) Impose a suitable fine on the college.
(iii) Shifting the examination centre from the college to another college for a specific period of not less than one
year.
*****
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

I Year – I SEMESTER

Sl. Course Subjects L T P Credits

No Code
1 20HE1T01 Professional Communicative English 3 0 0 3
2 20BM1T01 Differential Equations and Numerical Methods 3 0 0 3
3 20BC1T02 Applied Chemistry 3 0 0 3
4 20CS1T01 Programming for Problem Solving Using C 3 0 0 3
5 20ME1T02 Engineering Drawing 1 0 4 3
6 20HE1L01 Professional Communicative English Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
7 20BC1L02 Applied Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
8 20CS1L01 Programming for Problem Solving Using C 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
Total Credits 19.5

I Year – II SEMESTER
Sl. Course Subjects L T P Credits
No Code
1 20BM2T02 Linear Algebra and Partial Differential Equations 3 0 0 3
2 20BP2T02 Applied Physics 3 0 0 3
3 20CS2T04 Object Oriented Programming through Java 3 0 0 3

4 20EC2T01 Network Analysis 3 0 0 3

5 20EE2T03 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 0 0 3

6 20EC2L01 Electronic workshop 0 0 3 1.5

7 20EE2L03 Basic Electrical Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
8 20BP2L02 Applied Physics Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
9 20BE2T01 Environmental Science 3 0 0 0

Total Credits 19.5

 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

II Year I Semester

Hours per
S week
Category Course Title Course Code Credits
No
L T P
Mathematics-III (Transforms &
1 BSC 3 0 0 3
Vector Calculus)
2 PCC Signals and Systems 20EC3T04 3 0 0 3
3 PCC Electronic Devices and Circuits 20EC3T05 3 0 0 3
4 PCC Switching Theory and Logic Design 20EC3T06 3 0 0 3
5 ESC Data Structures 3 0 0 3
6 ESC (LAB) OOPS through Java Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCC (LAB) Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab 20EC3L02 0 0 3 1.5
Switching Theory and Logic Design
8 PCC (LAB) 20EC3L03 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
9 SOC* Interactive Programming 20EC3L04 0 0 4 2
Mandatory
10 course Constitution of India 2 0 0 0
Total credits 21.5

II Year II Semester

Hours per
S No Category Course Title Course Code week Credits
L T P
1 PCC Electronic Circuit Analysis 20EC4T07 3 0 0 3
2 PCC Digital IC Applications 20EC4T08 3 0 0 3
3 PCC Control Systems 20EC4T09 3 0 0 3
Random Variables and Stochastic
4 PCC 20EC4T10 3 0 0 3
Process
5 ESC Python Programming 3 0 0 3
6 ESC (LAB) Python Programming Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCC (LAB) Electronic Circuit Analysis Lab 20EC4L05 0 0 3 1.5
8 PCC (LAB) Digital IC Applications Lab 20EC4L06 0 0 3 1.5
9 SOC* IoT Applications 20EC4L07 0 0 4 2
Total credits 21.5
Internship 2 Months (Mandatory) during summer vacation
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

III Year I Semester

S Hours per week

Category Course Title Course Code Credits
No L T P
1 PCC Analog ICs and Applications 20EC5T11 3 0 0 3
Electromagnetic Waves and
2 PCC 20EC5T13 3 0 0 3
Transmission Lines
3 PCC Analog and Digital Communications 20EC5T14 3 0 0 3
Open Elective courses 1

Surveying 20CE5T01 3 0 0 3
Renewable Energy Engineering 20EE5T13 3 0 0 3
4 OEC
Operations Research 20ME5T21 3 0 0 3
Deep Learning 20AM5T03 3 0 0 3
Entrepreneurship 20HM5T03 3 0 0 3
Professional Elective courses -1
Antenna and Wave Propagation 20EC5T16 3 0 0 3
5 PEC Electronic Measurements and
20EC5T17 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation
Computer Architecture & Organization 20EC5T18 3 0 0 3
6 ECC Analog ICs and Applications LAB 20EC5L06 0 0 3 1.5
Analog and Digital Communications
7 ECC Lab 20EC5L07 0 0 3 1.5
Soft Skills and Interpersonal
8 SOC Communication 20HE5S01 1 0 2 2
Essence of Indian Traditional
9 MCC Knowledge 20MC5T01 2 0 0 0
Summer Internship 2 Months (Mandatory) after second
0 0 0 1.5
year (to be evaluated during V semester
Total credits 21.5

Honors/Minor courses (The hours distribution can be 3-0-2 or

4 0 0 4
3-1-0 also)
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

III Year II Semester

Hours per week

S No Category Course Title Course Code Credits
L T P
1 PCC Microprocessor and Microcontrollers 20EC6T21 3 1 0 3
2 PCC VLSI Design 20EC6T22 3 0 0 3
3 PCC Digital Signal Processing 20EC6T23 3 0 0 3
Professional Elective courses - 2

Microwave Engineering 20EC6T27 3 0 0 3

4 PEC
Mobile & Cellular Communication 20EC6T28 3 0 0 3

CMOS Analog IC Design 20EC6T29 3 0 0 3

Open Elective courses 2

Disaster Management 20CE6T35 3 0 0 3
Fundamentals of Electric
5 OEC 20EE6T19 3 0 0 3
Vehicles
Introduction to Automobile
20ME6T25 3 0 0 3
Engineering
Computer Forensics 20CS6T15 3 0 0 3
Microprocessor and Microcontrollers
6 ECC 20EC6L08 0 0 3 1.5
- Lab
7 ECC VLSI Design Lab 20EC6L09 0 0 3 1.5
8 ECC Digital Signal Processing Lab 20EC6L10 0 0 3 1.5
9 SOC Arm/Aurdino based Programming 20EC6S03 1 0 2 2
10 MC Research Methodology 20HM6T10 2 0 0 0
Total credits 21.5
Industrial/Research Internship (Mandatory) 2 Months during summer vacation

Honors/Minor courses (The hours distribution can be 3-0-2

4 0 0 4
or 3-1-0 also)
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

IV Year I Semester
Hours per
S week
Category Course Title Course Code Credits
No
L T P
Professional Elective courses -3
Optical Communication 20EC7T31 3 0 0 3
1 PEC
Digital Image Processing 20EC7T32 3 0 0 3
Low Power VLSI Design 20EC7T33 3 0 0 3
Professional Elective courses -4
Satellite Communications 20EC7T34 3 0 0 3
2 PEC
Embedded Systems 20EC7T35 3 0 0 3
Digital IC Design using CMOS 20EC7T36 3 0 0 3
Professional Elective courses -5
Radar engineering 20EC7T37 3 0 0 3
3 PEC Internet of Things 20EC7T38 3 0 0 3
Pattern recognition & Machine
20EC7T39 3 0 0 3
Learning
Open Elective courses 3
Highway Engineering 20CE7T11 3 0 0 3
Battery Management Systems
20EE7T29 3 0 0 3
4 OEC and Charging Stations
Additive Manufacturing 20ME7T28 3 0 0 3
Big data analytics 20DS7T02 3 0 0 3
Organizational behavior 20HM7T09 3 0 0 3
Open Elective courses 4
Water resource Engineering 20CE7T13 3 0 0 3
Smart Grid Technologies 20EE7T30 3 0 0 3
5 OEC Sustainable Energy Technologies 20ME7T38 3 0 0 3
Cryptography and network
20IT7T10 3 0 0 3
security
Marketing Management 20HM7T04 3 0 0 3
Universal Human Values-II 20HM7T11
6 HSC 3 0 0 3
Understanding Harmony
Designer tools (HFSS, Microwave
7 SOC Studio CST. Cadence Virtuoso. 20EC7S04 1 0 2 2
Synopsys, Mentor Graphics, Xilinx.)
Industrial/Research Internship 2 Months (Mandatory) after third
0 0 0 3
year (to be evaluated during VII semester
Total credits 23

Honors/Minor courses (The hours distribution can be 3-0-2 or

4 0 0 4
3-1-0 also)
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

IV Year II Semester

Hours per
S No Category Course Title Course Code week Credits
L T P
Project work, seminar and internship in
1 PROJ 20EC8P01 - - - 12
industry
INTERNSHIP (6 MONTHS)
Total credits 12
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Professional Communicative English

Common to CE, EEE, MECH, ECE, CSE, CSE (DS), CSE (AI&ML), & IT
I B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Course Code 20HE1T01
Course Type L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1
2

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Emphasizes that the ultimate aim of Education is to enhance wisdom and K2
CO1
inspires the readers to serve their nation with their self enrichment.
Enables the learners to promote peaceful co-existence and universal
CO2 K2
harmony in society and empowers them to initiate innovation.
Imparts the students to manage different cultural shock due to K3
CO3 globalization and develop multiculturalism to appreciate diverse cultures
and motivate them to contribute to their nation
Arouses the thought of life to lead in the right path by recognizing the K2
CO4
importance of work besides enhancing their LSRW skills.
Inspires the learners at the advancement of software by the eminent K2
CO5 personalities and motivates the readers to think and tap their innate
talents.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2
CO2 2 3
CO3 2 2
CO4 2 2
CO5 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
The Greatest Resource- Education' from Professional Communicative English.
Objective: Schumacher describes the education system by saying that it was mere
training, something more than knowledge of facts. Outcome: Underscores that the
UNIT I ultimate aim of Education is to enhance wisdom.
War' from ‗Panorama: A Course on Reading' Objective: To develop extensive
reading skill and comprehension for pleasure and profit. Outcome: Acquisition of
LSRW skills
' A Dilemma' from Professional Communicative English. Objective: The lesson
centres on the pros and cons of the development of science and technology.
Outcome: Enables the students to promote peaceful co-existence and universal
UNIT II harmony among people in society
'The Verger' from ‗Panorama: A Course on Reading' Objective: To develop
extensive reading skill and comprehension for pleasure and profit. Outcome:
Acquisition of LSRW skills
'Cultural Shock': Adjustments to new Cultural Environments from Professional
Communicative English. Objective: Depicts of the symptoms of Cultural Shock and
the aftermath consequences Outcome: Enables the students to manage different
UNIT III cultural shocks due to globalization.
' The Scarecrow' from Panorama: A Course on Reading Objective: To develop
extensive reading skill and comprehension for pleasure and profit. Outcome:
Acquisition of LSRW skills
‗The Secret of Work‘ from Professional Communicative English. Objective:
Portrays the ways of living life in its real sense. Outcome: Arouses the thoughtto
lead life in a right path by recognizing the importance of work.
UNIT IV
'A Village Lost to the Nation' from Panorama: A Course on Reading Objective: To
develop extensive reading skill and comprehension for pleasure and profit.
Outcome: Acquisition of LSRW skills
' The Chief Software Architect' from Professional Communicative English.
Objective: Supports the developments of technology for the betterment of human
life. Outcome: Pupil gets inspired by eminent personalities who toiled for the
UNIT V present-day advancement of software development.
'Martin Luther King and Africa' from Panorama: A Course on Reading Objective:
To develop extensive reading skill and comprehension for pleasure and profit.
Outcome: Acquisition of LSRW skills

TEXT BOOKS
PANORAMA: A COURSE ON READING, Published by Oxford University Press India
1.
The course content, along with the study material, is divided into six units
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Differential Equations and Numerical Methods

(Common to CE, EEE, ME, ECE, CSE,CSE-DS, CSE-AI&ML& IT)
I B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Basic Sciences Course Code 20BM1T01
Course Type L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Differentiation, Integration Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to equip the students with the necessary mathematical skills and
1
techniques that are essential for an engineering course
The skills derived from the course will help the student form a necessary base to develop
2
analytic and design concepts.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 solve first order differential equations and its applications K3
solve the linear differential equations with constant coefficients by
CO2 K3
appropriate method
apply Newton, Gauss and Lagrange interpolation formulae to find
CO3 K3
interpolating polynomials for the given data.
find the approximate roots of transcendental equations by using
CO4 K2
different numerical methods
CO5 solve initial value problems by using different numerical schemes K3

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Differential equations of first order and first degree
Linear – Bernoulli – Exact – Reducible to exact. Applications: Newton‘s Law of
UNITI cooling – Law of natural growth and decay – Orthogonal trajectories.
Linear differential equations of higher order
Non-homogeneous equations of higher order with constant coefficients with
UNITII non- homogeneous form polynomials in - Method
ofVariation of parameters.
Interpolation
Introduction– Errors in polynomial interpolation – Finite differences – Forward
UNITIII differences–Backward differences –Central differences –properties – Differences
of a polynomial- Newton‘s formulae for interpolation –Gauss formulae for
interpolation- Interpolation with unequal intervals: Lagrange‘s interpolation
formula.
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
UNITIV Introduction- Bisection method – Method of false position – Iteration method
– Newton-Raphson method (One variable).
Solution of Ordinary Differential equations
Solution of ordinary differential equations by Taylor‘s series-Picard‘s method of
UNIT-V successive approximations-Euler‘s method – Modified Euler‘s method - Runge-
Kutta method (second and fourth order).

TEXT BOOKS
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, Wiley-India
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Micheael Greenberg, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th edition, Pearson edn
2. Dean G. Duffy, Advanced engineering mathematics with MATLAB, CRC Press
3. Peter O’neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Cengage Learning.
4. Srimanta Pal, Subodh C.Bhunia, Engineering Mathematics, Oxford University Press.
WEB RESOURCES
UNIT I: Differential equations of first order and first degree
http://um.mendelu.cz/maw-html/index.php?lang=en&form=ode
1.
https://www.khanacademy.org/math/differential-equations/first-order-differential-
equations
UNIT II: Linear differential equations of higher order
2. http://um.mendelu.cz/maw-html/index.php?lang=en&form=ode
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/122107037/20
UNIT III: Interpolation
3.
https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Introduction_to_Numerical_Methods/Interpolation
UNIT IV: Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
4. https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Numerical_Methods/Equation_Solving
https://www.slideshare.net/100005232690054/algebraic-and-transcendental-equations
UNIT V: Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111107063/
https://www.facweb.iitkgp.ac.in/~rajas/cgen/page/nptlcrs
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Applied Chemistry
I B. Tech I Semester
Course Basic Sciences Course Code 20BC1T02
Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3 – 0 – 3 – 4.5
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Intermediate
Semester End Examination 70
Chemistry
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To learn about the hardness of water, boiler troubles, Drinking water standards and
1
methods ofremoval of hardness of water.
To get knowledge on Electrochemical cells, Batteries, fuel cells and fuels and their
2
applications.
3 To study about the factors affecting corrosion and their controlling methods.
To learn about Cement, its setting and hardening and about Polymers, Plastics and
4
Elastomers.
To study about Nano materials, their preparation, and applications and to create
5
awareness onsurface chemistry.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Compare the quality of drinking water with BIS and WHO Standards K2
Illustrate the principles and applications of Batteries, Fuel cells and
CO2 K3
fuels.
CO3 Identify different types of corrosion and their controlling methods. K3
Illustrate the principles of setting and hardening of cement and explain
CO4 K2
about polymers and their engineering applications.
CO5 Analyze the importance of nano materials and surface chemistry. K4
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 2 3 3 2 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO3 1 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 1 2 1 1 2
CO5 2 3 2 2 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
WATER TECHNOLOGY 8 hrs
Introduction –Hard and Soft water, Estimation of Hardness by EDTA Method - Boiler
troubles - Scale and Sludge- Specifications for Drinking water, Bureau of Indian
Standards (BIS) and World Health Organization (WHO) standards, Zeolite and Ion-
Exchange processes- Desalination of Brackish water, Reverse Osmosis (RO) and
UNIT Electro Dialysis.
I Learning Outcomes:
The student will be able to
List the differences between temporary and permanent hardness of water (L1)
Explain the Principles of Reverse Osmosis and Electro dialysis. (L2)
Compare quality of Drinking water with BIS and WHO standards. (L2)
Illustrate Disadvantages associated with hard water. (L2)
ENERGY SOURCES AND APPLICATIONS 10hrs
Electrodes: Electrode potential, Determination of Single Electrode Potential –Nernst‘s
equation, Reference electrodes: Hydrogen and Calomel electrodes
Batteries: Primary cell- Dry or Leclanche cell, Secondary cell- Lithium batteries
(Lithium- MnO2); Fuel cells: H2-O2 fuel cell, Methanol fuel cell
Fuels- Types of fuels, Calorific value, Numerical problems based on Calorific value;
Analysis of Coal, Liquid fuels : Refining of Petroleum, Cracking: Catalytic cracking-
UNIT
Fixed bed and Moving bed methods, Knocking and Anti knocking agents, Octane and
II
Cetane Values.
Biofuels – Bio Diesel, Power Alcohol.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
Apply Nernst equation for calculating electrode and cell potentials (L3)
Compare different batteries and their applications (L2)
Explain calorific values, octane number, refining of petroleum and cracking of oils (L2)
CORROSION AND ITS CONTROLLING METHODS 6+6 hrs
III-A: Corrosion: Definition – Theories of Corrosion-Dry corrosion: Metal oxide
formation
- Pilling Bed Worth ratio; Electro Chemical Corrosion: Mechanism, Factors affecting
the Corrosion rate (pH, temperature, DO).
UNIT III-B: Corrosion Controlling Methods: Sacrificial and Impressed Current Cathodic
III Protection. Metallic Coatings – Galvanizing and Tinning- Electro Plating and
Electroless Plating.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
Apply Pilling Bedworth rule for Corrosion and Corrosion Prevention (L3) Demonstrate
the corrosion prevention methods and factors affecting corrosion (L2)
POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND CEMENT 10 hrs
UNIT Polymers: Introduction- Functionality of Monomers, Chain (Addition) Polymerization,
IV Step (Condensation) Polymerization, Co-Ordination Polymerization, Co Polymerization
with examples and Mechanism.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Conducting Polymers – Mechanism of Conduction in Poly acetylene, Poly aniline and

their Applications,
Plastics: Thermoplastics and Thermo Setting Resins; Preparation, Properties and
Applications of Polystyrene and Bakelite.
Elastomers: Preparation, Properties and applications of Buna-S and Thiokol.
Cement: Portland Cement, Constituents, Manufacture of Portland Cement, Chemistry
of Setting and Hardening of Cement.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
Explain different types of polymers and their applications (L2)
Demonstrate the mechanism of conduction in conducting polymers (L2) Identify
the constituents of Portland cement and explanation of the manufacturing of
cement(L2)
Enumerate the reactions at different temperatures in the Manufacture of Cement (L2)
NANOMATERIALS AND SURFACE CHEMISTRY 8 hrs
Nanomaterials: Introduction, Preparation of Carbon Nano Tubes (CNTs) by Arc
discharge and Chemical Vapor Deposition Methods.
Fullerenes -Preparation, Properties and Applications.
Chemical synthesis of Nanomaterials: Sol-gel method, Applications of
Nanomaterials inWastewater treatment, Medicine and in Lubricants.
Surface Chemistry: Introduction to Surface Chemistry, Colloids, Nanometals and
UNIT
Nanometal Oxides, Functionalization of Surface of Nanomaterials, Applications of
V
Colloids and Nanomaterials in Catalysis and Sensors.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this unit, the students will be able to
Classify Nanomaterials. (L-2)
Explain the Synthesis and applications of Nanomaterials. (L-2)
Identify the application of Colloids and Nanomaterials in Medicine, Sensors and
Catalysis (L2)

TEXT BOOKS
1. P.C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 15/e, Dhanapat Rai & Sons, Delhi (2014).
2. Engineering Chemistry by Shikha Agarwal: Cambridge University Press,2019 edition .
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sashi Chawla, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanapath Rai and sons, (2003)
2. S.S. Dara, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, S.Chand& Co, (2010)
N. Krishna Murthy and Anuradha, A text book of Engineering Chemistry, Murthy
3.
Publications (2014)
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Programming for Problem solving using C

I B.Tech I Semester
(Common to CE, ME, EEE, ECE, CSE, CSE (AI&ML),CSE(DS), IT)
Course Category Engineering Science Course Code 20CS1T01
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End 70
ExaminationTotal Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To learn about the computer systems, computing environments, developing of a computer
1
program and Structure of a C Program
2 To gain knowledge of the operators, selection, control statements and repetition in C
To learn about the design concepts of arrays, strings, enumerated structure and union types
3
and their usage.
To assimilate about pointers, dynamic memory allocation and know the significance of
4
Preprocessor.
5 To assimilate about File I/O and significance of functions

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Apply the fundamentals of C Programming for Problem solving. K3
Identify the appropriate Decision statement and Loops for a given
CO2 K2
Problem.
CO3 Make use of Arrays and Strings to solve the problems in C. K3
design and implement programs to analyze the different pointer
CO4 K3
applications
CO5 Develop solutions for problems using Files and Functions. K3
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1
CO4 2 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Computers: Creating and running Programs, Computer Numbering
System, Storing Integers, Storing Real Numbers
Introduction to the C Language: Background, C Programs, Identifiers, Types,
Variable, Constants, Input/output, Programming Examples, Scope, Storage Classes
UNIT I
and Type Qualifiers. Structure of a C Program: Expressions Precedence and
Associativity, Side Effects, Evaluating Expressions, Type Conversion Statements,
Simple Programs, Command Line
Arguments.
Bitwise Operators: Exact Size Integer Types, Logical Bitwise Operators, Shift
Operators.
Selection & Making Decisions: Logical Data and Operators, Two Way Selection,
UNIT II Multiway Selection, More Standard Functions.
Repetition: Concept of Loop, Pretest and Post-test Loops, Initialization and
Updating, Event and Counter Controlled Loops, Loops in C, Other Statements
Related to Looping, Looping Applications, Programming Examples.
Arrays: Concepts, Using Array in C, Array Application, Two Dimensional Arrays,
Multidimensional Arrays, Programming Example – Calculate Averages Strings:
String Concepts, C String, String Input / Output Functions, Arrays of Strings, String
UNIT III
Manipulation Functions String/ Data Conversion, A Programming Example – Morse
Code Enumerated, Structure, and Union: The Type Definition (Type def),
Enumerated Types, Structure, Unions, and Programming Application.
Pointers: Introduction, Pointers to pointers, Compatibility, L value and R value
Pointer Applications: Arrays, and Pointers, Pointer Arithmetic and Arrays, Memory
UNIT IV
Allocation Function, Array of Pointers, Programming Application. Processor
Commands: Processor Commands.
Functions: Designing, Structured Programs, Function in C, User Defined Functions,
Inter- Function Communication, Standard Functions, Passing Array to Functions,
Passing Pointers to Functions, Recursion
UNIT V Text Input / Output: Files, Streams, Standard Library Input / Output Functions,
Formatting Input / Output Functions, Character Input / Output Functions Binary
Input / Output: Text versus Binary Streams, Standard Library, Functions for Files,
Converting File Type.

TEXT BOOKS
Programming for Problem Solving, Beerhouse A. Forouzan, Richard F.Gilberg,
1.
CENGAGE.
2. The C Programming Language, Brian W.Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie, 2e, Pearson.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Computer Fundamentals and Programming, Sumithabha Das, Mc Graw Hill.
2. Programming in C, Ashok N. Kamthane, Amit Kamthane, Pearson.
3. Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C, Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh,OXFORD.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

ENGINEERING DRAWING
(Common for EEE, ECE & ME)
I B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Engineering Science Course Code 20ME1T02
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 1-0-4-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the students to use drawing instruments and to draw polygons, Engineering
1
Curvesand Scales.
2 To introduce the students to use orthographic projections, projections of points and lines.
3 To make the students draw the projections of the planes.
4 To make the students draw the projections of the various types of solids.
5 To represent the object in 3D view through isometric views.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cogniti
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: ve
Level
CO1 Construct polygons, scales and engineering curves. K3

Identify the position of points and lines with use of orthographic K3

CO2
projections.
Analyze the location and position of plane figures through K4
CO3
orthographicprojections.
Analyze the location and position of solid bodies through K4
CO4
orthographicprojections.
CO5 Develop 2D and 3D objects by converting their views. K4

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - 1 - 1 -
CO2 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 - 1 -
CO3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 - 1 -
CO4 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 - 1 -
CO5 3 2 1 3 3 - - - - - 1 - 1 -
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT

Introduction to Engineering Drawing.

Polygons: Constructing regular polygons by general method.
UNIT I Curves: Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola by general methods tangent & normal
for the curves. Cycloidand Involutes.
Scales: Vernier and Diagonal scales
Orthographic Projections: Introduction, importance of reference lines, projections
UNIT II of points in various quadrants. Projections of straight lines inclined to both the
planes, determination of true lengths and angleof inclination
Projections of planes: Regular planes perpendicular/parallel to one plane. Regular
UNIT III
planes inclined to oneplane and parallel to other, inclined to both the planes
Projections of Solids: Simple positions of Prisms, Pyramids, Cones and Cylinders.
UNIT IV
Solids inclined to both the planes
Isometric Projections: Introduction, Conversion of isometric views to
UNIT V orthographic views, Conversionof orthographic views to isometric views.
Introduction to AutoCAD (Demo only)

TEXT BOOKS
1. Engineering Drawing by N.D. Bhatt, Chariot Publications, 56th Edition
Engineering Drawing + AutoCad – K Venugopal, V. Prabhu Raja, New Age
2.
International (P) Limited (2008)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Drawing by K.L.Narayana & P. Kannaiah, Scitech Publishers, 3rd Edition
2. Engineering Graphics for Degree by K.C. John, PHI Publishers
3. Engineering Graphics by PI Varghese, Mc Graw Hill Publishers, 2013
4. Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, 2014
B.V.R. Gupta & M. Raja Roy, Engineering Drawing, I.K. International Publishing House
5.
Pvt. Ltd.,2009
WEB RESOURCES
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019/
2. http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/me2011/handouts/drawing/blanco-tutorial.html
https://www.cartercenter.org/resources/pdfs/health/ephti/library/lecture_notes/env_health_s
3.
cience_ stu dents/engineeringdrawing.pdf
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Professional Communicative English Laboratory

Common to CE, EEE, MECH, ECE, CSE, CSE (DS), CSE (AI&ML), & IT
I B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Course Code 20HE1L01
Course Type L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1
2

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Understand different speech sounds and maintain proper
CO1 K2
pronunciation and rhythm in day to day conversations.
Interpret and respond appropriately in various day to day contexts and
CO2 K5
improves technics in group discussions.
Develop the required communication skills to deliver effective
CO3 K6
presentations and interviews with clarity and impact.

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT I Introduction, Consonant Sounds, Vowel Sounds
UNIT II Rhythm and Pronunciation, Weak/strong and contrasted forms, Practice of Rhythm
UNIT III Dialogues

UNIT IV Group Discussion

UNIT V Presentations & Public Speaking

UNIT VI Interviews

TEXT BOOKS
1. A Multimodal Course in Communication Skills‘ Published by Maruthi Publications
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

APPLIED CHEMISTRY LAB

I B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Basic sciences Course Code 20BC1L02
Course Type Lab L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 25
Basic Chemistry Semester End Examination 50
Total Marks 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1
2

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 2
CO3 2 1
CO4
CO5
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
(Any 10 of the following listed 13 experiments)

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Introduction to chemistry laboratory – Molarity, Normality, Primary, Secondary standard
solutions, Volumetric titrations, Quantitative analysis
1. Estimation of HCI using standard Na2CO3 solutions
2. Determination of alkalinity of a sample containing Na2CO3 and NaOH 3.Estimation of
KmnO4 using standard Oxalic acid solution.
4. Estimation of Ferrous iron using standard K2Cr2O7 solution
5. Determination of Temporary and permanent Hardness of water using standard EDTA
solution.
6. Determination of % moisture content in a coal sample.
7.Determination of Mg2+ present in an antacid
8. Estimation of HCl using standard NaOH Solution by Conductometric titration.
9. Estimation of Vitamin – C
10. Preparation of Phenol – Formaldehyde Resin
11. Determination of viscosity of a liquid
12. Determination of surface tension of a liquid
Preparation of Nano particles.(Cu/Zn)

TEXT BOOKS
Mendham J, Denney RC, Barnes JD, Thosmas M and Sivasankar B Vogel‘s
1. Quantitative
Chemical Analysis 6/e, Pearson publishers (2000)
N.K Bhasin and Sudha Rani Laboratory Manual on Engineering Chemistry 3/e,
2.
Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (2007)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Vogel‘s Textbook of Quantitative chemical analysis, J. Mendham et.al
WEB RESOURCES
1. www.bsauniv.ac.in/UploadImages/Downloads/Estimation%20of%20Hardness
2. https://pubs.acs.org/doi/abs/10.1021/i560133a023
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Programming for Problem solving using C Lab

(Common to CE, ME, EEE, ECE, CSE, CSE (AI&ML),CSE(DS), IT)
I B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Engineering Science Course Code 20CS1L01
Course Type Lab L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 Apply the principles of C language in problem solving.

2 To design flowcharts, algorithms and knowing how to debug programs.

3 To design & develop of C programs using arrays, strings pointers & functions.

4 To review the file operations, preprocessor commands.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Knowledge on various concepts of a C language. K3

CO2 Draw flowcharts and write algorithms.

K3
CO3 Design and development of C problem solving skills.
K3
CO4 Design and develop modular programming skills.
K3
CO5
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Exercise 1:
1. Write a C program to print a block F using hash (#), where the F has a
1. heightof six characters and width of five and four characters.
2. Write a C program to compute the perimeter and area of a rectangle
with aheight of 7 inches and width of 5 inches.
3. Write a C program to display multiple variables.
2. Exercise 2:
1. Write a C program to calculate the distance between the two points.
2. Write a C program that accepts 4 integers p, q, r, s from the user where
r ands are positive and p is even. If q is greater than r and s is greater than p and if
the sum of r and s is greater than the sum of p and q print "Correct values",
otherwise print "Wrong values".
3. Exercise 3:
1. Write a C program to convert a string to a long integer.
2. Write a program in C which is a Menu-Driven Program to compute the
area ofthe various geometrical shape.
3. Write a C program to calculate the factorial of a given number.
4. Exercise 4:
1. Write a program in C to display the n terms of even natural number and their sum.
2. Write a program in C to display the n terms of harmonic series and their sum. 1
+ 1/2 + 1/3 + 1/4 + 1/5 ... 1/n terms.
3. Write a C program to check whether a given number is an Armstrong number or
not.
5. Exercise 5:
1. Write a program in C to print all unique elements in an array.
2. Write a program in C to separate odd and even integers in separate arrays.
3. Write a program in C to sort elements of array in ascending order.
6. Exercise 6:
1. Write a program in C for multiplication of two square Matrices.
2. Write a program in C to find transpose of a given matrix.
7. Exercise 7:
1. Write a program in C to search an element in a row wise and
column wisesorted matrix.
2. Write a program in C to print individual characters of string in reverse order.
8. Exercise 8:
1. Write a program in C to compare two strings without using string library
functions.
2. Write a program in C to copy one string to another string.
9. Exercise 9:
1. Write a C Program to Store Information Using Structures with
DynamicallyMemory Allocation
2. Write a program in C to demonstrate how to handle the pointers in the program.
10. Exercise 10:
1. Write a program in C to demonstrate the use of & (address of) and
*(value ataddress) operator.
2. Write a program in C to add two numbers using pointers
11. Exercise 11:
1. Write a program in C to add numbers using call by reference.
2. Write a program in C to find the largest element using Dynamic
MemoryAllocation.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

12. Exercise 12:

1. Write a program in C to swap elements using call by reference.
2. Write a program in C to count the number of vowels and consonants in a
stringusing a pointer.
13. Exercise 13:
1. Write a program in C to show how a function returning pointer.
2. Write a C program to find sum of n elements entered by user. To
perform thisprogram, allocate memory dynamically using malloc( ) function.
14. Exercise 14:
1. Write a C program to find sum of n elements entered by user. To perform
this program, allocate memory dynamically using calloc( ) function. Understand
the difference between the above two programs
2. Write a program in C to convert decimal number to binary number using the
function.
15. Exercise 15:
1. Write a program in C to check whether a number is a prime
number ornot using the function.
2. Write a program in C to get the largest element of an array using the
function.
16. Exercise 16:
1. Write a program in C to append multiple lines at the end of a text file.
2. Write a program in C to copy a file in another name.
3. Write a program in C to remove a file from the disk.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Linear Algebra and Partial Differential Equations

(Common to CE, ME, ECE, CSE, IT, CSE-DS, CSE-AI&ML)
I B. Tech II Semester
Course 20BM2T
Basic Sciences Course Code
Category 02
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Basics of Matrices,
Semester End Examination 70
Differentiation, Integration
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to equip the students with the necessary mathematical skills and
1
techniques that are essential for an engineering course.
The skills derived from the course will help the student form a necessary base
2
todevelop analytic and design concepts.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
solve systems of linear equations, determine the rank, find the K3
CO1
eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix.
identify special properties of a matrix, such as positive definite, K2
CO2 etc., and use this information to facilitate the calculation of
matrix characteristics.
CO3 find areas and volumes using double and triple integrals K2

find partial derivatives of multivariable functions and apply K3

CO4
them to find extreme values of a function.
CO5 apply a range of techniques to find solutions of standard PDEs K3

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Solving system of linear equations, Eigen Values and Eigen vectors
Rank of a matrix by echelon form and normal form – Solving system of
UNIT I homogeneous and non- homogeneous linear equations – Gauss elimination
method, Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel for solving system of equations –
Eigenvalues and Eigen vectors and their properties.
Cayley-Hamilton Theorem and Quadratic forms
Cayley-Hamilton theorem (without proof) – Finding inverse and powers of a
UNIT II matrix by Cayley- Hamilton theorem – Quadratic forms-Reduction to canonical
form by congruent transformations- nature of the quadratic form - reduction of
quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation.
Multiple integrals
Multiple integrals: Double and triple integrals – Change of variables -Polar
UNIT III
coordinates -Cylindrical coordinates– Change of order of integration.
Applications: Finding Areas and Volumes.
Partial differentiation
Introduction – Homogeneous function – Euler‘s theorem – Total
derivative – Chain rule – Generalized Mean value theorem for single
UNIT IV variable (without proof) – Taylor‘s and Maclaurin‘s series expansion of
functions of two variables – Jacobian – Functional dependence.
Applications: Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables
without constraints and Lagrange‘s method (with constraints).
Partial Differential Equations and Applications
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants
UNIT V and arbitrary functions –solutions of first order linear (Lagrange) equation and
nonlinear (standard types) equations.
Applications: One dimensional wave and heat equations.

TEXT BOOKS
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, Wiley-India
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Micheael Greenberg, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th edition, Pearson edn
2. Dean G. Duffy, Advanced engineering mathematics with MATLAB, CRC Press
3. Peter O’neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Cengage Learning.
4. Srimanta Pal, Subodh C.Bhunia, Engineering Mathematics, Oxford University Press.
5. T.K.V. Iyengar et. al., Engineering Mathematics Volume I & III S Chand Publications.
6. T. Amarnath, An Elementary Course in Partial Differential Equations, Narosa Publications
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

APPLIED PHYSICS
I B. Tech II Semester
Course Category BASIC SCIENCES Course Code 20BP2T02
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Intermediate Physics Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
Impart Knowledge of Physical Optics phenomena like Interference and Diffraction required
1
todesign instruments with higher resolution.
Impart the knowledge of Lasers, Optical Fibers and their implications in
2
optical communications.
To explain the significant concepts of dielectric and magnetic materials that leads to
3
potential applications in emerging micro devices.
To explain the concepts of Quantum Mechanics and free electron theories for study of
4
metals and semiconductors.
Understand the formation of bands in Semiconductors and their working mechanism for
5
their utility in Engineering applications

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Analyze the optical applications using the concepts of Interference and
CO1 K4
diffraction.
Apply the basics of Laser Mechanism and fiber optics for the
CO2 K3
communications systems.
Apply the basics of phenomenon related to dielectric materials and
CO3 MagneticMaterials to study their dependence on temperature and K43
frequency response.
Understand the concepts of quantum mechanics for calculation of free
CO4 quantum particle energies and phenomenon of electrical & thermal K2
conductivities to sub microscopic particles.
Understand the Band formation, electrical conductivities in
CO5 K2
semiconductorsand study the types of semiconductors using Hall Effect.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - -
CO5 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
WAVE OPTICS
(10 hrs) INTERFERENCE
Introduction-Principle of Superposition – Coherent Sources – Interference in parallel
thin film(reflection geometry)- Newton‘s rings, Determination of Wavelength and
UNIT I Refractive Index & Applications.
DIFFRACTION
Introduction-Types of diffraction-Fraunhoffer diffraction due to single slit, Double
slit, N Slits (Qualitative)-Rayleigh criterion of resolution and Resolving power of
grating(Qualitative).
LASERS (8hrs)
Introduction-Characteristics–Spontaneous and Stimulated emission of radiation –
population inversion - Pumping Schemes - Ruby laser – Helium Neon laser –
Applications
UNIT
FIBER OPTICS:
II
Introduction- Structure & Principle of Optical Fiber-Numerical Aperture and
Acceptance Angle-classification of Optical fibers based on Refractive Index Profile
and Modes- Block Diagram of optical fiber communication system- Advantages of
Optical fibers- Applications
MAGNETICS PROPERTIES (12 hrs)
Introduction-Magnetic dipole moment-Magnetization-Magnetic susceptibility and
permeability- Origin of permanent magnetic moment -Classification of Magnetic
materials Dia,Para,Ferro,Antiiferro and Ferri Magnetic materials-Weiss Domain
Theory(Qualitative Treatment)-Hysteresis-B-H Curve-soft and hard magnetic
UNIT
materials & applications
III
DIELECTRICS
Introduction - Dielectric polarization– Dielectric Polarizability, Susceptibility and
Dielectric constant-types of polarizations- Electronic Ionic and Orientation
polarizations (qualitative)
– Lorentz Internal field – Claussius-Mossoti equation -Applications of dielectrics.
QUANTUM MECHANICS (9hrs)
Introduction – Matter waves – de Broglie‘s hypothesis–Interpretation of wave
function – Schrödinger Time Independent and Time Dependent wave equations –
UNIT Particle in a potentialbox
IV FREE ELECTRON THEORY
Classical Free Electron Theory(Qualitative with discussions of merit and demerits)-
Quantum Free Electron Theory-Equation of conductivity based on quantum free
electron theory-FermiDirac Distribution-Density of States-Fermi Energy
BAND THEORY OF SOLIDS (9hrs)
Bloch‘s Theorem(Qualitative)-Kronig Penny Model(Qualitative)-E vs K diagram-
UNIT V vs K diagram, Effective mass of electron-Classification of Crystalline Solids-
V Concept of hole
SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS
Introduction–Intrinsic Semi conductors - density of charge carriers- Electrical
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

conductivity –Fermi level – extrinsic semiconductors - p-type & n-type -

Density of charge carriers- Drift and Diffusion currents-Einstein‘s Equation -Hall
effect - Applications of Hall effect

TEXT BOOKS
Engineering Physics by M.N.Avadhanalu,P.G.Kshirsagar & T V S Arun
1.
Murty,S ChandPubication,11th Edition 2019
2. ―Engineering Physics‖ by M.R.Srinivasan, New Age international publishers
3. Engineering Physics by P.K Palanisamy,Sci Tech Publication
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kettles Introduction to Solid state Physics-Charles Kittel,Wiley India Edition
2. Solid State Physics ,AJ Dekker, I Edition,Macmillan Publishers India Private Limited
3. ―Solid State Physics‖ by SO Pilai., - New age International Publishers
4. Engineering Physics by DK Bhattacharya and Poonam Tandon,Oxford Press(2018)
5.
WEB RESOURCES
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/122/107/122107035/#
1.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/122/107/122107035/#
https://pragatiengg.org/pluginfile.php/29143/mod_folder/content/0/UNIT%20IV%20LASER
S%20.p ptx?forcedownload=1
2.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/104/104/104104085/
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115/107/115107095/
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113/104/113104090/
3.
https://youtu.be/DDLljK1ODeg
https://study.com/academy/lesson/the-de-broglie-hypothesis-definition-significance.html
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115/101/115101107/
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115/105/115105122/
https://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/diode/diode_1.html
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115/105/115105099/
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108122/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING THROUGH JAVA

(ECE )
I B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20CS2T04
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
C,C++ Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 the analytical skills of object oriented programming

2 Overall development of problem solving and critical analysis.

3 Formal introduction to Java programming language.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Apply decision and iteration control structures to implement algorithms K3
CO1
and classes from the specifications.
CO2 Implement inheritance and packages K3

Demonstrate an introductory understanding of graphical user K1

CO3
interfaces, multithreaded programming, and event-driven programming.
CO4 Implement I/O programming K3

CO5 Implementing multi Multithreading and exception handling in java K3

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 3 2 1

CO2 3 3 3 1 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 1

CO4 3 3 2 1 1

CO5 3 3 2 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Java : Basics of Java programming, Data types, Variables, Operators,
Control structures including selection, Looping, Java methods, Overloading, Math
UNIT I class, Arrays in java. Objects and Classes : Basics of objects and classes in java,
Constructors, Finalizer, Visibility modifiers, Methods and objects, Inbuilt classes
like String, Character, StringBuffer, File, this reference.
Inheritance and Polymorphism : Inheritance in java, Super and sub class, Overriding,
Object class, Polymorphism, Dynamic binding, Generic programming, Casting
UNIT II
objects, Instance of operator, Abstract class, Interface in java, Package in java, UTIL
package.
Event and GUI programming : Event handling in java, Event types, Mouse and key
events, GUI Basics, Panels, Frames, Layout Managers: Flow Layout, Border
UNIT Layout, Grid Layout, GUI components like Buttons, Check Boxes, Radio Buttons,
III Labels, Text Fields, Text Areas, Combo Boxes, Lists, Scroll Bars, Sliders,
Windows, Menus, Dialog Box, Applet and its life cycle,
Introduction to swing, Creating a swing applet, swing controls and components.
UNIT I/O programming: Text and Binary I/O, Binary I/O classes, Object I/O, Random
IV Access Files. Event driven model, handling events
Multithreading in java: Thread life cycle and methods, Runnable interface, Thread
UNIT V synchronization, Exception handling with try-catch-finally, Collections in java,
Introduction to JavaBeans and Network Programming.

TEXT BOOKS
Introduction to Java Programming (Comprehensive Version), Daniel Liang,
1.
Seventh Edition, Pearson
2. Programming in Java, Sachin Malhotra& Saurabh Chaudhary, Oxford University Press..
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Murach‘s Beginning Java 2, Doug Lowe, Joel Murach and Andrea Steelman,SPD.
2. Core Java Volume-I Fundamentals, Eight Edition, Horstmann& Cornell, Pearson Education.
The Complete Reference, Java 2 (Fourth Edition), Herbert Schild,TMH. Java
3.
Programming, D. S. Malik, Cengage Learning.
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/java/java_object_classes.
2. http://beginnersbook.com/2015/07/java-swing-tutorial/
3. http://www.realapplets.com/tutorial/
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aUlwgdakBug
5. http://beginnersbook.com/2013/04/java-exception-handling/ and words in a text file.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

NETWORK ANALYSIS
(ECE)
I B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Course Code 20EC2T01
Course Type L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 To understand the basic concepts on RLC circuits

2 To know the behavior of the steady states and transients‘ states in RLC circuits
3 To know the basic Laplace transforms techniques in periods‘ waveforms
4 To understand the two port network parameters
5 To understand the properties of LC networks and filters

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Gain the knowledge on basic network elements.

CO2 Analyze the RLC circuits behavior in detailed

CO3 Analyze the performance of periodic waveforms.

Gain knowledge in characteristics of two port network parameters (Z, Y,
CO4
ABCD, h, g).
CO5 Analyze the filter design concepts in real world applications.

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO PO
PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2

CO1 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 1 1

CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2

CO3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2

CO4 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2

CO5 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Electrical Circuits: Network elements classification, Electric charge and
current, Electric energy and potential, Resistance parameter – series and parallel
combination, Inductance parameter – series and parallel combination, Capacitance
parameter
– series and parallel combination. Energy sources: Ideal, Non-ideal, Independent and
dependent sources, Source transformation, Kirchoff‘s laws, Mesh analysis and Nodal
analysis problem solving with resistances only including dependent sources.
UNIT
Fundamentals and Network Topology: Definitions of terms associated with periodic
I
functions: Time period, Angular velocity and frequency, RMS value, Average value,
Form factor and peak factor- problem solving, Phase angle, Phasor representation,
Addition and subtraction of phasors, mathematical representation of sinusoidal
quantities, explanation with relevant theory, problem solving. Principal of Duality with
examples.
Network Topology: Definitions of branch, node, tree, planar, non-planar graph,
incidence matrix, basic tie set schedule, basic cut set schedule
Transients: First order differential equations, Definition of time constants, R-L circuit,
R-C circuit with DC excitation, evaluating initial conditions procedure, second order
UNIT
differential equations, homogeneous, non-homogenous, problem solving using R-L-C
II
elements with DC excitation and AC excitation, Response as related to s-plane rotation
of roots. Solutions using Laplace transform method
Steady State Analysis of A.C Circuits: Impedance concept, phase angle, series R-L, R-
C, R- L- C circuits problem solving. Complex impedance and phasor notation for R-L,
R-C, R-LC problem solving using mesh and nodal analysis, Star-Delta conversion,
UNIT
problem solving.
III
Coupled Circuits: Coupled Circuits: Self-inductance, Mutual inductance, Coefficient of
coupling, analysis of coupled circuits, Natural current, Dot rule of coupled circuits,
conductively coupled equivalent circuits- problem solving
Resonance: Introduction, Definition of Q, Series resonance, Bandwidth of series
resonance, Parallel resonance, Condition for maximum impedance, current in anti-
UNIT resonance, Bandwidth of parallel resonance, general case-resistance present in both
IV branches, anti- resonance at all frequencies Network Theorems: Thevinin‘s, Norton‘s,
Milliman‘s, Reciprocity, Compensation, Substitution, Superposition, Max Power
Transfer, Tellegens- problem solving using dependent sources also
Two-port Networks: Relationship of two port networks, Z-parameters, Y-parameters,
Transmission line parameters, h-parameters, Inverse h-parameters, Inverse
UNIT
Transmission lineparameters, Relationship between parameter sets, Parallel connection
V
of two port networks, cascading of two port networks, series connection of two port
networks, problem solving including dependent sources also

TEXT BOOKS
1. Network Analysis – ME Van Valkenburg, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition,2000
2. Network Analysis by K.Satya Prasad and S Sivanagaraju, Cengage Learning
3. Electric Circuit Analysis by Hayt and Kimmarle, TMH
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Network lines and Fields by John. D. Ryder 2ndedition, Asia publishing house.
2. Basic Circuit Analysis by DR Cunninghan, Jaico Publishers
3. Network Analysis and Filter Design by Chadha, Umesh Publications
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Basic Electrical Engineering

(ECE)
I B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Engineering Sciences Course Code 20EE2T03
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
NA Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To learn the constructional details, operating principle and performance of transformers.
To understand the constructional details, operating principle and operational characteristics of
2
Induction machines.
To study the constructional details, operating principle of single phase induction motors
3
and synchronous Generators
4 To learn the operating principle and starting methods of synchronous motors.
To understand the operating principle, characteristics of DC machines and speed control
5
methods of DC Motors.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Explain the constructional details, operating principle and performance of K2
CO1
transformers.
Explain the constructional details, operating principle and operational K2
CO2
characteristics of Induction machines.
Explain the constructional details, operating principle of single phase K2
CO3
induction motors and synchronous generators.
Explain the operating principle and starting methods of synchronous K2
CO4
motors.
Understand the operating principle, characteristics of DC machines and K2
CO5
speed control methods of DC Motors.

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1

CO2 3 2 1 1

CO3 3 2 1 2

CO4 3 2 1 1

CO5 3 2 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Transformers
UNIT I Constructional details, operating principle – EMF equation- equivalent circuit –
Losses, efficiency and voltage regulation – direct load test, OC & SC tests.

Induction Machines
Constructional details, operating principle - types – torque-slip characteristics-
UNIT II
efficiencystarting methods-Brake test on 3-phase induction motor.

Single Phase Induction Motor

Constructional details, operating principle - starting methods - shaded pole motor,
capacitorstart and run motors.
UNIT III
Synchronous Generators
Constructional details, operating principle – types - EMF equation – phasor diagram
-voltageRegulation by synchronous impedance method.
Synchronous motors
UNIT IV Constructional details, operating principle – starting methods. excitation and
power factor control Phasor diagrams
DC Machines
Constructional details, operating principle – types – EMF and torque equations –
UNIT V
three point starter – speed control methods of DC motor – Swinburne‗s Test-
applications.

TEXT BOOKS
Electric Machinery by A. E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Jr. and Stephen D.Umans
1.
McGraw-Hill Higher Education,6thEdition.
2. Principles of electric machines by V.K.Mehta& Rohit Mehta, S.Chand publications
3. Theory and performance of Electrical machines by J.B.Gupta, S.K.Kataria& Sons.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Basic Electrical Engineering by M.S Naidu and S. Kamakshiah TMH Publications.
2. Fundamentals of Electrical engineering by Rajendra Prasad, PHI publications, 2nd Edition.
3. Basic Electrical Engineering by Nagsarkar, Sukhija, Oxford Publications, 2nd Edition.
Basic Electrical Engineering by D C Kulshreshtha McGraw-Hill Education, revised 1st
4.
Edition.
5. Electrical Technology by B L Theraja&A.K.Theraja, S.Chand publications ,Volume 2
WEB RESOURCES
1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/108108076/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/122106025/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

ELECTRONIC WORKSHOP LAB(ECE)

I Year II Semester
Course Category Course Code 20EC2L01
Course Type L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 learn the identification of components and laboratory equipment

2 practice the soldering, PCB layout and testing of components
3 obtain the frequency response of RL, RC circuits and determining network parameters
verify network theorems like superposition, reciprocity, maximum power transfer,
4
Thevenin‘s and Norton‘s

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand component identification and usage of laboratory equipment.

CO2 Practice the soldering, PCB layout and testing of components.

CO3 Analyze frequency response of RL, RC circuits and network parameters.

Verification of network theorems like superposition, reciprocity,

CO4 maximum power transfer,
Thevenin‘s and Norton‘s.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 1 2
CO2 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO3 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO4 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 2 1 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Cycle-1 (Workshop):
I. Identification of components
II. Laboratory equipment
III. Soldering practice
IV. PCB Layout
V. Testing of Components
VI. CRO
I. Identification of components:
 Resistors: - Types of Resistors, Value of Resistance using color code, DRBS.
 Capacitors: - Types of capacitors, value of capacitance using color code, DCBS.
 Inductors: - Types of Inductors, DLB
 Rheostats: - Types of Rheostats, Types of potentiometers, Relays.
 Switches: - Types of Switches.
 Cables: Types of Cables.
 Types of Instruments used. Identification of active elements. (Two Terminal,
ThreeTerminal Devices) (SC diode, Zener diode, D.AC)
 Three Terminal Devices: BJT, UJT, SCR, FET, MOSFET, TRIAC.
 Digital and Analog ICs. (TO and Flat packages) IC regulators types.
Testing of above components using Multimeter
II. Laboratory Equipment:
A) Meters: -
Types of Voltmeters, Types of Ammeters both Analog and Digital.Types of Multi meters (Analog &
Digital) AVO Meters and FET input Voltmeter.
B) Laboratory Function Generators and Audio Oscillators.
C) Power Supplies.
D) RF generators.
E) Different Types of Transformers. (Power, AF, RF, etc.)
III. Soldering practice
IV. PCB layout and Design - Materials required, centimeter graph sheets, marker.
V. Testing of Components - Active and Passive Components.
VI. CRO - Acquaintance with CRO and Measurements on CRO
PART-B (Networks Lab)
1. Series and Parallel Resonance – Timing, Resonant frequency, Bandwidth and Q-
factor determination for RLC network.
2. Time response of first order RC/RL network for periodic non-sinusoidal inputs –
timeconstant and steady state error determination.
3. Determination of Two port network parameters – Z-Y Parameters, chain matrix
and analytical verification.
4. Verification of Superposition and Reciprocity theorems.
5. Verification of maximum power transfer theorem. Verification on DC, verification on
AC with Resistive and Reactive loads.
6. Experimental determination of Thevenin‘s and Norton‘s equivalent circuits and
verification by direct test.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Basic Electrical Engineering Lab

(ECE)
I B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Engineering Sciences Course Code 20EE2L03
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
NA Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To learn the constructional details, operating principle and performance of transformers.
To understand the constructional details, operating principle and operational characteristics
2
of Induction machines.
To study the constructional details, operating principle of single phase induction motors and
3
synchronous generators
4 To learn the operating principle and starting methods of synchronous motors.
To understand the operating principle, characteristics of DC machines and speed control
5 methods of DC
Motors.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Explain the constructional details, operating principle and performance of K2
CO1
transformers.
Explain the constructional details, operating principle and operational K2
CO2
characteristics of Induction machines.
Explain the constructional details, operating principle of single phase K2
CO3
induction motors and synchronous generators.
Explain the operating principle and starting methods of synchronous K2
CO4
motors.
Understand the operating principle, characteristics of DC machines and K2
CO5
speed control methods of DC Motors.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Transformers
UNIT I Constructional details, operating principle – EMF equation- equivalent circuit
– Losses, efficiency and voltage regulation – direct load test, OC & SC tests.

Induction Machines
Constructional details, operating principle - types – torque-slip characteristics-
UNIT II
efficiencystarting methods-Brake test on 3-phase induction motor.

Single Phase Induction Motor

Constructional details, operating principle - starting methods - shaded pole motor,
capacitor start and run motors.
UNIT III
Synchronous Generators
Constructional details, operating principle – types - EMF equation – phasor
diagram -voltage regulation by synchronous impedance method.
Synchronous motors
UNIT IV Constructional details, operating principle – starting methods. excitation and
power factor control Phasor diagrams
DC Machines
Constructional details, operating principle – types – EMF and torque equations –
UNIT V
three point starter – speed control methods of DC motor – Swinburne‗s Test-
applications.

TEXT BOOKS
Electric Machinery by A. E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Jr. and Stephen D.Umans
1.
McGraw-Hill Higher Education,6thEdition.
2. Principles of electric machines by V.K.Mehta& Rohit Mehta, S.Chand publications
3. Theory and performance of Electrical machines by J.B.Gupta, S.K.Kataria& Sons.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Basic Electrical Engineering by M.S Naidu and S. Kamakshiah TMH Publications.
2. Fundamentals of Electrical engineering by Rajendra Prasad, PHI publications, 2nd Edition.
3. Basic Electrical Engineering by Nagsarkar, Sukhija, Oxford Publications, 2nd Edition.
Basic Electrical Engineering by D C Kulshreshtha McGraw-Hill Education, revised 1st
4.
Edition.
5. Electrical Technology by B L Theraja&A.K.Theraja, S.Chand publications ,Volume 2
WEB RESOURCES
1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/108108076/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/122106025/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY

I-II EEE,ECE,CSE(DS),CSE(AI & ML
I B. Tech II Semester
Course Category BASIC SCIENCES Course Code 20BP2L02
Course Type Lab L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Intermediate Physics Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1
2

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Understand the basics of Interference, Diffraction in Physics using
CO1 K2
instruments like Spectrometer, Travelling microscope.
CO2 Determine the Magnetic and Dielectric constants of materials. K3
Apply the basics of Current Electricity and Semiconductors in
CO3 K3
engineering application

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 - -
CO2 2 - -
CO3 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT: (Any 10 of the following listed 15 experiments):

8 Regular mode and any two experiments in Virtual mode(Virtual Lab)
1. Determination of wavelength of laser Light using diffraction grating.
2. Determination of wavelength of a light using Diffraction Grating-Normal incidence.
3. Newton‘s rings – Determination of Radius of Curvature of Plano - Convex Lens.
4. Determination of thickness of a spacer using wedge film and parallel interference fringes.
5. Magnetic field along the axis of a current carrying coil – Stewart and Gee‘s apparatus.
6. Energy Band gap of a Semiconductor p - n junction.
7. Characteristics of Thermistor – Temperature Coefficients
8. Determination of dielectric constant by charging and discharging method
9. Study the variation of B versus H by magnetizing the magnetic material (B-H curve).
10. Determination of Dispersive power of diffraction grating.
11. To Study the V-I Characteristics and determine the breakdown voltage of a Zener Diode
Determination of Hall Voltage and Hall coefficients of a given semiconductor using Hall
12.
effect.
Determination of Acceleration due to gravity and Radius of gyration Using Compound
13.
Pendulum.
14. Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle of an Optical Fiber
15. Estimation of Planck‘s Constant using Photoelectric Effect.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Environmental Sciences
(Common to CE, ME, ECE, CSE, CSEDS&AI, IT)
I B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Basic Sciences Course Code 20BE2T01
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Basic
Internal Assessment 30
Knowledge in
Semester End Examination 70
Environment
Total Marks 100
and protection.

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To make the students to get awareness on environment, to understand the importance of
1 protecting natural resources, ecosystems for future generations and pollution causes due to the
day to day activities of human life to save earth from the inventions by the engineers.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Gain a higher level of personal involvement and interest in understanding
CO1
and solving environmental problems.
Comprehend environmental problems from multiple perspectives with
CO2
emphasis on human modern lifestyles and developmental activities
Demonstrate knowledge relating to the biological systems involved in the
CO3
major global environmental problems of the 21st century
Recognize the interconnectedness of human dependence on the earth‘s
CO4
ecosystems
CO5 Influence their society in proper utilization of goods and services.

Learn the management of environmental hazards and to mitigate

CO6 disasters and have a clear understanding of environmental concerns and
follow sustainable development practices
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
CO2 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CO3 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CO4 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CO5 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Multidisciplinary nature of Environmental Studies

Definition, Scope and Importance-International Efforts & Indian
Environmentalists
Natural Resources
Forest resources : deforestation – Mining, dams and other effects on forest and
tribal people. Water resources :Use and over utilization of surface and
groundwater.
Food resources: World food problems, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-
UNIT – I pesticide problems. Energy resources: renewable and nonrenewable energy
sources.
Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.Equitable use of
resources for sustainable lifestyles.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
Articulate the basic structure, functions, and processes of key social systems
affecting the environment Explain why renewable and non-renewable energy
resources are important.
Explain how water resources should be used.
Ecosystems, Biodiversity and its conservation
Definition of Ecosystem and its structure, Functions Biodiversity
Definition-Value of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation, Threats
to biodiversity, Conservation of biodiversity, Endangered and endemic
species of India.
UNIT- II
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
Get a clear picture of structure and functions of ecosystems.
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of theories in the field of
Biodiversity and Systematic inthe broad sense.
Explain endangered and endemic species of India
Environmental Pollution and Solid Waste Management
Definition, Cause, Effects of Air pollution, Water pollution, Noise pollution,
Radioactive pollution, Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
Solid Waste Management: Sources, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial waste,
UNIT- III
e-waste management
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
Understand Cause, effects and control measures of air pollution. Understand solid
waste management
Social Issues and the Environment
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act. –Water (Prevention and control of
Pollution) Act-Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation, Rain
water harvesting, Global Environmental challenges-case studies
UNIT IV
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
Explain the enforcement of Environmental legislations
Acquire knowledge on various environmental challenges induced due to
unplanned anthropogenic activities.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Explain the reasons for global warming

Human population and the Environment
Population growth, Women and child welfare, Role of Information
technology in environment and human health. Impact Assessment and its
significances, stages of EIA

Field work:
A mini project related to Environmental issues / to visit a local polluted site
UNIT-V (Submission of project by every student)
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Students will have
Explain various types of
information technologies
Explain the theories of
population explosion
Acquire knowledge on various environmental challenges induced due to
unplanned anthropogenic activities

TEXT BOOKS
1. Environmental Studies for undergraduate courses by ErachBharucha,UGC.
A Textbook of Environmental Studies by Dr.S.AzeemUnnisa,Acadamic publishing
2.
company.
Environmental Studies by P.N. Palanisamy, P. Manikandan, A. Geetha, and K. Manjula Rani;
3.
Pearson Education, Chennai
REFERENCE BOOKS
Text Book of Environmental Studies by Deeshita Dave & P. UdayaBhaskar, Cengage
1.
learning.
Glimpses of Environment by K.V.S.G. Murali Krishna Published byEnvironmental
2.
Protection Society, Kakinada, A.P.
3. Environmental Studies by Benny Joseph, Tata McGraw Hill Co, New Delhi
Environmental Studies by PiyushMalaviya, Pratibha Singh, Anoopsingh: Acme Learning,
4.
New Delhi.
An Introduction to Environmental Pollution by Dr.B.k.Sharma AND Dr.(Miss)H.kaur,Goel
5.
publishing House ,a unit of Krishna Prakasham Media (p) LH,Meerut –India
WEB RESOURCES
UNIT-1: MULTI DISPLINARY NATURE OF ENVIRONMENT and NATURAL
RESOURCES
1.
http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/climatechange
https://www.climatesolutions.org https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Ecology/Ecosystems
UNIT-2:ECOSYSTEM, BIODIVERSITY AND ITS CONSERVATION
2.
http://conbio.net/vl/ and www.biodiversitya-z.org/content/biodiversity
UNIT-3: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION
3. https://www.omicsonline.org/environment-pollution-climate-change.php and
https://www.britannica.com/technology/solid-waste-management
UNIT-4: SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT
4.
http://www.publichealthnotes.com/solid-waste-management/
UNIT-5: HUMANPOPULATION AND THE
NVIRONMENThttp://www.ecoindia.com/education/water-conservation.html
5.
https://thewaterproject.org/water_conservation\
https://legalcareerpath.com/what-is-environmental-law/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Transforms and Vector Calculus

(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Basic Science Course Code 20BM3T03
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment Semester 30
Prerequisites End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSEOBJECTIVES
1. The course is designed to equip the students with the necessary mathematical
skills and techniques that are essential for an engineering course.
2. The skills derived from the course will help the student form a necessary base to
develop analytic and design concepts.
\
COURSE OUTCOMES
Up on successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive Level
CO1 examine the properties of Laplace transformation K3
solve ordinary differential equations by using Laplace
CO2 K2
transformation technique
expand a periodic function as a Fourier series and find Fourier
CO3 K3
transform of a given function.
understand vector differential properties of scalar and vector point
CO4 K2
functions and their applications.
apply Green‘s, Stokes and Divergence theorem to evaluate line,
CO5 K3
surface and volume integrals.
K1: Remember,K2: Understand,K3: Apply,K4: Analyze,K5: Evaluate,K6: Create

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes(1–Low, 2–

Medium, 3 –High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSECONTENT

UNIT I Laplace transforms: Laplace transforms of standard functions – Properties -

Periodic functions - Unit step function – Dirac‘s delta function.
Inverse Laplace transforms: Inverse Laplace transforms – Properties –
UNIT II Convolution theorem (without proof).
Applications: Solving ordinary differential equations (initial value problems)
using Laplace transforms.
Fourier Analysis: Introduction- Periodic functions – Dirichlet‘s conditions - Fourier
series of a function, even and odd functions –Change of interval – Half-range sine
UNIT III
and cosine series. Fourier integral theorem (without proof) – Fourier sine and cosine
integrals – sine and cosine transforms – Inverse transforms.

UNIT IV Vector Differentiation: Gradient - Directional derivative - Divergence – Curl –

Laplacian and second order operators – Vector identities.

Vector Integration: Line integral – Work done – Potential function – Area,

UNIT V Surface and volume integrals - Vector integral theorems: Greens, Stokes and Gauss
Divergence theorems (without proof) and related problems.

Text Book
1 B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers.
2 Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, Wiley-India
Reference Book
1 Micheael Greenberg, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th edition, Pearson edn
2 Dean G. Duffy, Advanced engineering mathematics with MATLAB, CRC Press
3 Peter O’neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Cengage Learning.
4 Srimanta Pal, Subodh C.Bhunia, Engineering Mathematics, Oxford University Press.
5 T.K.V. Iyengar et. al., Engineering Mathematics Volume I & III S Chand Publications.
6 Murray R Speigel, Schaum's Outline of Vector Analysis, Schaum‘s Outline.
7 Shanti Narayan, Integral Calculus – Vol. 1 & II
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Signals and Systems

(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC3T04
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment Semester 30
Prerequisites Linear Algebra End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSEOBJECTIVES
1. To study the changes that occur to the signal as they pass through systems.
2. To predict with some certainty the behavior of the system when subjected to the different
input signals.
3. To provide the overview of the concept, the theory, and the mathematical tools in the
applications in diversified fields such as Digital Signal Processing, Image processing,
Modulation & Detection, etc.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Up on successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
classify signals, systems and understanding the difference between discrete and
CO1 continuous time signals, systems and ability to determine the response of linear L2
systems to any input signal by convolution in the time domain.
Understand the definitions and basic properties (time-shift, modulation,
L4
CO2 Parseval's Theorem) of Fourier series and the application of the LTI system as
a frequency selective filter.
Understand represent aperiodic signal (discrete & continuous) as linear
combination of complex exponential and basic properties of Fourier Transform L2
CO3
and representation of continuous and discrete system by differential &
difference equation.
apply the Sampling theorem, reconstruction, aliasing, and Nyquist's theorem to
represent continuous-time signals in discrete time and to understand generalize
CO4 L3
Continuous-Time Fourier transform known as Laplace Transform, its
properties.
Approach Discrete-Time to develop z-Transform, which is the counterpart of
CO5 L3
Laplace transform for Continuous-Time.
L1: Remember,L2: Understand,L3: Apply,L4: Analyze,L5: Evaluate,L6: Create

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes(1–Low, 2–

Medium, 3 –High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS0O1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO4 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO5 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSECONTENT
Signals & Systems-Continuous-Time & Discrete-Time Signals, Signal Energy and
Power, Transformation of independent variable (Continuous to discrete, scaling,
sifting), Periodic Signals, Even & Odd Signals, Exponential & Sinusoidal Signals
(Continuous & Discrete), The Unit Impulse & Unit –Step Functions (Continuous &
Discrete), Continuous-Time & Discrete-Time Systems, Properties. Classification of
UNIT I
Systems with examples (LTV, LTI, NLTV and NLTI).
Linear Time-Invariant System-Discrete-Time LTI Systems, Continuous-Time LTI
Systems, Properties of LTI Systems, Causal LTI system Described by Differential &
Difference equations, Singularity function, Defining Unit Impulse function through
Convolution.
Fourier Series-Fourier Series Representation of Continuous-Time Periodic Signal,
Dirichlet‘s Conditions, Properties of Continuous-Time Fourier Series. Fourier Series
UNIT II Representation of Discrete-Time Periodic Signal, Properties of Discrete -Time
Fourier Series. Frequency selective Filters, Discrete-Time Filters Described by
Difference Equation.
Fourier Transform-Development of the Fourier Transform Representation of an
Aperiodic Signal (Only Concept, No Derivation), Properties of Continuous-Time
Fourier Transform, Frequency-Selective Filtering with Variable Centre Frequency,
System Characterized by Linear Constant Coefficient Differential Equations.
UNIT III
Discrete-Time Fourier Transform of an Aperiodic Signals (No Derivation),
Properties of Discrete-Time Fourier Transform, Duality Between the Discrete-Time
Fourier Transform and Continuous-Time Fourier Series, System Characterized by
Linear Constant-Coefficient Difference Equation.
Sampling-Impulse-Train Sampling, Sampling with a Zero-Order Hold,
Reconstruction of a Signal from its Samples Using Interpolation, The Effect of Under
sampling: Aliasing.
UNIT IV The Laplace Transform-The Laplace Transform, The Region of Convergence
(ROC) for Laplace Transform, The Inverse Laplace Transform, Properties of Laplace
Transform, Causality & Stability of a continuous LTI System, Relation Between
Laplace & Fourier Transform.
The Z-Transform-The z-Transform, The Region of Convergence of z-Transform,
The Inverse z-Transform, Properties of z-Transform, Causality & Stability of a
UNIT V
Discrete LTI System. LTI System Characterized by Linear Constant Coefficient
Difference Equation.

Text Book
1 Signals and Systems – A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, PHI, 2nd Edition.
2 B.P. Lathi - Principles of Linear Systems and Signals (2009, Oxford University Press)
Reference Book
1 Signals, Systems&Communications-B.P.Lathi,BSPublications,2003.
2 TK Rawat- Signals and Systems, Oxford University press, 2011.
3 Simon Haykin and VanVeen- Signals & Systems, Wiley,2ndEdition
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Electronic Devices and Circuits

(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC3T05
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Engineering Physics Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will:
learn and understand the basic concepts of semiconductor physics and study the physical
1
phenomena of PN junction diode.
understand the application of diodes as rectifiers with their operation and characteristics
2
with and without filters are discussed.
Acquire knowledge about the principle of working and operation of Bipolar Junction
3
Transistor and Field Effect Transistor and their characteristics.
4 learn and understand the purpose of transistor biasing and its significance.
understand the small signal low frequency BJT and FET transistor amplifiers models and
5
compare different configurations.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Apply the basic concepts of semiconductor physics and understand the
CO1 formation of p-n junction and how it can be used as a p-n junction as diode K2
in different modes of operation
Know the construction, working principle of rectifiers with and without
CO2 K2
filters with relevant expressions and necessary comparisons.
Understand the construction, principle of operation of transistors, BJT and K2
CO3
FET with their V-I characteristics in different configurations.
Apply the concepts of transistor biasing, various biasing techniques for BJT
CO4 K3
and FET and stabilization concepts with necessary expressions.
Perform the analysis of small signal low frequency transistor amplifier
CO5 K3
circuits using BJT and FET in different configurations
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2
- Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
COURSE CONTENT
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Review of Semiconductor Physics: Insulators, Semiconductors, and Metals,

classification usingenergy band diagrams, mobility and conductivity, electrons and
holes in intrinsicsemiconductors, extrinsic semiconductors, drift and diffusion,
charge densities insemiconductors, Hall effect, continuity equation, law of junction,
UNIT-I Fermi Dirac function,Fermi level in intrinsic and extrinsic Semiconductors
Junction Diode Characteristics: energy band diagram of PN junction Diode, Open
circuited p-n junction, Biased p-n junction, p-n junction diode, current components
in PN junction Diode, diode equation, V-I Characteristics, temperature dependence
on V-I characteristics, Diode resistance, Diode capacitance.
Special Semiconductor Devices: Zener Diode, Breakdown mechanisms, Zener
diode applications, LED, Varactor Diode, Photodiode, Tunnel Diode, UJT, PN-PN
Diode, SCR. Construction, operation and V-I characteristics.
Rectifiers and Filters: Basic Rectifier setup, half wave rectifier, full wave rectifier,
UNIT-II
bridge rectifier, derivations of characteristics of rectifiers, rectifier circuits-operation,
input and output waveforms, Filters, Inductor filter (Series inductor), Capacitor filter
(Stunt inductor), π- Filter, comparison of various filter circuits in terms of ripple
factors
BJT: Junction transistor, transistor current components, transistor equation,
transistor configurations, transistor as an amplifier, characteristics of transistor in
Common Base, Common Emitter and Common Collector configurations, Ebers-Moll
model of a transistor, punch through/ reach through, Photo transistor, typical
UNIT-III
transistor junction voltage values.
FET: FET types, construction, operation, characteristics µ, gm, rd parameters,
MOSFET-types, construction, operation, characteristics, comparison between JFET
and MOSFET.
Transistor Biasing and Thermal Stabilization: Need for biasing, operating point,
load line analysis, BJT biasing- methods, basic stability, fixed bias, collector to base
UNIT-IV bias, self-bias, Stabilization against variations in VBE, Ic, and β, Stability factors, (S,
S', S'‘), Bias compensation, Thermal runaway, Thermal stability. FET Biasing-
methods and stabilization.
Small Signal Low Frequency Transistor Amplifier Models:
BJT: Two port network, Transistor hybrid model, determination of h-parameters,
conversion of h-parameters, generalized analysis of transistor amplifier model using
UNIT-V h-parameters, Analysis of CB, CE and CC amplifiers using exact and approximate
analysis, Comparison of transistor amplifiers.
FET: Generalized analysis of small signal model, Analysis of CG, CS and CD
amplifiers, comparison of FET amplifiers.

TEXT BOOKS
Electronic Devices and Circuits- J. Millman, C. Halkias, Tata Mc-Graw Hill,
1.
2ndEdition,2007
Electronics Devices &Circuit theory- Robert L.Boylestad and Loui Nashelsky,
2.
Pearson/Prentice hall, 10th Edition, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Integrated Electronics-J. Millman, C. Halkias,Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2ndEdition,2009
2. Electronic Devices and Integrated Circuits – B.P. Singh, Rekha, Pearson publications
Electronic Devices and Circuits-Salivahanan, Kumar, Vallavaraj, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 4th
3.
Edition, 2008.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Switching Theory and Logic Design

(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester

Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC3T06

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Basics of Electronics and
Prerequisites Semester End Examination 70
Logic Gates
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will learn
typical number base conversion, error coding techniques, Theorems and functions of Boolean
1
algebra and behavior of logic gates.
2 Boolean function simplification using Karnaugh maps and Quine-McCluskey methods
3 the concepts of combinational circuits
4 the concepts of sequential circuits
5 The development of advanced sequential circuits.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Classify different number systems and apply to generate various codes. K2
Use the concept of Boolean algebra in minimization of switching
CO2 K2
functions.
CO3 Design different types of combinational logic circuits. K4
CO4 Apply the knowledge of flip-flops in designing of Registers and counters K3
The operation and design methodology for synchronous sequential
CO5 K3
circuits and algorithmic state machines.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -

Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO2 2 3 2 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
REVIEW OF NUMBER SYSTEMS & CODES: Representation of numbers of
different radix, conversation from one radix to another radix, r-1‘s compliments
and r‘s compliments of signed members. Gray code ,4-bit codes; BCD, Excess-3,
2421, 84-2-1 code etc. Error detection & correction codes: parity checking, even
parity, odd parity, Hamming code. BOOLEAN THEOREMS AND LOGIC
UNIT-I OPERATIONS: Boolean theorems, principle of complementation & duality, De-
Morgan‘s theorems. Logic operations; Basic logic operations -NOT, OR, AND,
Universal Logic operations, EX-OR, EX- NOR operations. Standard SOP and POS
Forms, NAND-NAND and NOR-NOR realizations, Realization of three level logic
circuits. Study the pin diagram and obtain truth table for the following relevant ICs
7400,7402,7404,7408,7432,7486.
MINIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Minimization and realization of switching
functions using Boolean theorems, K-Map (up to 6 variables) and tabular method
(Quine-McCluskey method) with only four variables and single function.
COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS DESIGN: Design of Half adder, full
UNIT-II
adder, half subtractor, full subtractor, applications of full adders; 4-bit adder-
subtractor circuit, BCD adder circuit, Excess 3 adder circuit and carry look-a-head
adder circuit, Design code converters using Karnaugh method and draw the
complete circuit diagrams.
COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS DESIGN USING MSI &LSI: Design
of encoder, decoder, multiplexer and de-multiplexers, Implementation of higher
order circuits using lower order circuits. Realization of Boolean functions using
decoders and multiplexers. Design of Priority encoder, 4-bit digital comparator and
UNIT-III
seven segment decoders. Study the relevant ICs pin diagrams and their functions
7442,7447,7485,74154.
INTRODUCTION OF PLD’s: PLDs: PROM, PAL, PLA -Basics structures,
realization of Boolean functions, Programming table.
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS I: Classification of sequential circuits (synchronous
and asynchronous), operation of NAND & NOR latches and flip-flops; truth tables
and excitation tables of RS flip-flop, JK flip-flop, T flip-flop, D flip-flop with reset
and clear terminals. Conversion from one flip-flop to another flip- flop. Design of
UNIT-IV
5ripple counters, design of synchronous counters, Johnson counter, ring counter.
Design of registers - Buffer register, control buffer register, shift register, bi-
directional shift register, universal shift, register. Study the following relevant ICs
and their relevant functions 7474,7475,7476,7490,7493,74121.
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS II: Finite state machine; state diagrams, state tables,
reduction of state tables. Analysis of clocked sequential circuits Mealy to Moore
UNIT-V conversion and vice-versa. Realization of sequence generator, Design of Clocked
Sequential Circuit to detect the given sequence (with overlapping or without
overlapping).

TEXT BOOKS
Switching and finite automata theory ZviKOHAVI,Niraj.K.Jha 3rdEdition,Cambridge
1.
UniversityPress,2009
2. Digital Design by M. Morris Mano, Michael D Ciletti,4th edition, PHIpublication,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Logic Design by Charles H. Roth Jr,JaicoPublishers,2006
2. Digital Design: Principles and Practices,John.F. Wakerly,4 thedition,Pearson Education
3. Switching Theory and Logic Design by A. Anand Kumar,PHI Learning pvtltd,2016.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Data Structures
(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester

Course Category Engineering Science Course Code 20IT3T01

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will learn
1 Introduce the fundamental concept of data structures and abstract data types
Emphasize the importance of data structures in developing and implementing
2
efficientalgorithms
Describe how arrays, records, linked structures, stacks, queues, trees, and graphs
3
arerepresented in memory and used by algorithms

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Level

CO1 Summarize the properties, interfaces, and behaviors of basic abstract K2

datatypes
Discuss the computational efficiency of the principal algorithms for sorting
CO2 K2
&searching
Use arrays, records, linked structures, stacks, queues, trees,
CO3 K3
andGraphs in writing programs
CO4 Demonstrate different methods for traversing trees K2
CO5 Implement algorithms on Graphs K3
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 – Low,

2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 2 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1
CO3 2 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1
CO4 2 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Data Structures - Definition, Classification of Data Structures, Operations on Data
Structures, Abstract Data Type (ADT), Preliminaries of algorithms. Time and
UNIT-I Space complexity. Searching - Linear search, Binary search, Fibonacci search.
Sorting- Insertion sort, Selection sort, Exchange (Bubble sort, quick sort),
distribution (radix sort), merging (Merge sort) algorithms.
Linked List: Introduction, Single linked list, Representation of Linked list in
memory, Operations on Single Linked list-Insertion, Deletion, Search and
Traversal ,Reversing Single Linked list, Applications on Single Linked list-
UNIT-II
PolynomialExpression Representation,Addition and Multiplication,
Sparse Matrix Representation using Linked List, Advantages and Disadvantages of
Single Linked list, Double Linked list-Insertion, Deletion, Circular Linked list-
Insertion, Deletion.
Queues: Introduction to Queues, Representation of Queues-using Arrays and using
Linked list, Implementation of Queues-using Arrays and using Linked list,
Application of Queues, Circular Queues, Deques, Priority Queues, Multiple
UNIT-III
Queues. Stacks: Introduction to Stacks, Array Representation of Stacks,
Operations on Stacks, Linked list Representation of Stacks, Operations on Linked
Stack, Applications-Reversing list, Factorial Calculation, Infix to Postfix
Conversion, Evaluating Postfix Expressions.
Trees: Basic Terminology in Trees, Binary Trees-Properties, Representation of
UNIT-IV Binary Trees using Arrays and Linked lists. Binary Search Trees- Basic
Concepts, BST Operations: Insertion, Deletion, Tree Traversals, Applications-
Expression Trees, Heap Sort, Balanced Binary Trees- AVL Trees, Insertion,
Deletion and Rotations.
Graphs: Basic Concepts, Representations of Graphs-Adjacency Matrix and using
UNIT-V Linked list, Graph Traversals (BFT & DFT), Applications- Minimum Spanning
Tree Using Prims & Kruskals Algorithm, Dijkstra‘s shortest path, Transitive
closure, Warshall‘s Algorithm.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Data Structures Using C. 2nd Edition. Reema Thareja, Oxford.
2. Data Structures and algorithm analysis in C, 2nd ed, Mark Allen Weiss.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, 2nd Edition, Horowitz, Sahni, Universities Press.
Data Structures: A PseudoCode Approach, 2/e, Richard F.Gilberg, Behrouz A.
2.
Forouzon,Cengage.
3. Data Structures with C, Seymour Lipschutz TMH
WEB RESOURCES
1. http://algs4.cs.princeton.edu/home/
2. https://faculty.washington.edu/jstraub/dsa/Master_2_7a.pdf
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Java Programming Laboratory

( ECE)
Course ESC Course Code 20CS3L07
Category
Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
Internal Assessment 15
Semester End 35
Prerequisites Examination
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 Practice programming in the Java
2 Gain knowledge of object-oriented paradigm in the Java programming language
3 Learn use of Java in a variety of technologies and on different platforms

COURSE OUTCOMES BTL

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1 Evaluate default value of all primitive data type, K3
CO2 Determine Class, Objects, Methods, Inheritance, Exception, K3
CO3 Illustrating simple inheritance, multi-level inheritance, K3
Note: K1- Remembering, K2-Understanding, K3-Applying, K4-Analyzing, K5-
Evaluating,K6-Creating

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 –

Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
P P
1 1 1 S S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 0 O O
1 2
C 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2
O1
C
O2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2
C 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2
O3
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Exercise - 1 (Basics)
a) Write a JAVA program to display default value of all primitive data type of
JAVA
b) Write a java program that display the roots of a quadratic equation
ax2+bx=0. Calculate the discriminate D and basing on value of D, describe the
1 nature of root.
c) Five Bikers Compete in a race such that they drive at a constant speed
which may or may not be the same as the other. To qualify the race, the speed
of a racer must be more than the average speed of all 5 racers. Take as input the
speed of each racer and print back the speed of qualifying racers.
Exercise - 2 (Operations, Expressions, Control-flow, Strings)
a) Write a JAVA program to search for an element in a given list of elements
using binary search mechanism.
2 b) Write a JAVA program to sort for an element in a given list of elements
using bubble sort
c) Write a JAVA program to sort for an element in a given list of elements
using merge sort.
d) Write a JAVA program using StringBuffer to delete, remove character.
Exercise - 3 (Class, Objects)
a) Write a JAVA program to implement class mechanism. Create a class,
3 methods and invoke them inside main method.
b) Write a JAVA program to implement constructor.
Exercise - 4 (Methods)
4 a) Write a JAVA program to implement constructor overloading. b) Write a
JAVA program implement method overloading.
Exercise - 5 (Inheritance)
a) Write a JAVA program to implement Single Inheritance
5 b) Write a JAVA program to implement multi level Inheritance
c) Write a java program for abstract class to find areas of different shapes
Exercise - 6 (Inheritance - Continued)
6 a) Write a JAVA program give example for ―super‖ keyword.
b) Write a JAVA program to implement Interface. What kind of Inheritance
can be achieved?
Exercise - 7 (Exception)
7 a) Write a JAVA program that describes exception handling mechanism
b) Write a JAVA program Illustrating Multiple catch clauses
Exercise – 8 (Runtime Polymorphism)
a) Write a JAVA program that implements Runtime polymorphism
8 b) Write a Case study on run time polymorphism, inheritance that implements
in above problem
Exercise – 9 (User defined Exception)
a) Write a JAVA program for creation of Illustrating throw
b) Write a JAVA program for creation of Illustrating finally
9 c) Write a JAVA program for creation of Java Built-in Exceptions
d) Write a JAVA program for creation of User Defined Exception
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Exercise – 10 (Threads)
a) Write a JAVA program that creates threads by extending Thread class
.First thread display―Good Morning ―every 1 sec, the second thread displays
―Hello ―every 2 seconds and the third display ―Welcome‖ every 3 seconds
10 ,(Repeat the same by implementing Runnable)
b) Write a program illustrating isAlive and join ()
c) Write a Program illustrating Daemon Threads.
Exercise - 11 (Threads continuity)
a) Write a JAVA program Producer Consumer Problem
11 b) Write a case study on thread Synchronization after solving the above
producer consumer problem
Exercise – 12 (Packages)
a) Write a JAVA program illustrate class path
12 b) Write a case study on including in class path in your os environment of
your package.
c) Write a JAVA program that import and use the defined your package in the
previous Problem
Exercise - 13 (Applet)
a) Write a JAVA program to paint like paint brush in applet.
13 b) Write a JAVA program to display analog clock using Applet.
c) Write a JAVA program to create different shapes and fill colors using Applet.
Exercise - 14 (Event Handling)
14 a) Write a JAVA program that display the x and y position of the cursor movement
using Mouse.
b) Write a JAVA program that identifies key-up key-down event user entering text in
a Applet.
Exercise-15 (AWT & Swings)
a) Write a Java Program to create a frame with three buttons and Radio Button
15 b) Write a Java Program to print text in different colors
c) Write a JAVA program that to create a single ball bouncing inside a JPanel.
Exercise-16 (JDBC)
16 a) Write a Java program to Connect database
b) Write a Java Program to insert, update, delete & select records

TEXT BOOKS
1. JAVA one step ahead, Anitha Seth, B.L.Juneja, Oxford.
2. The complete Reference Java, 8th edition, Herbert Schildt, TMH.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction to java programming, 7th edition by Y Daniel Liang, Pearson
2. Murach's Java Programming, Joel Murach
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105191/
2. https://www.w3schools.com/java/java_data_types.asp
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Electronic Devices and Circuits Laboratory

(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester

Course Category Lab Course Course Code 20EC3L02

Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
Internal Assessment 15
Prerequisites EDC Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To plot the V-I characteristics of semi-conductor diodes, transistors.
2 To calculate ripple factor and efficiency of rectifiers
3 To plot the frequency response of different amplifiers and design of oscillator circuits

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Understand the basic knowledge and analyze the characteristics of P-N
CO1 K2
Diode, Transistor, FET, UJT and SCR.
Calculate the ripple factor for half wave and full wave rectifiers with and
CO2 K2
without filters
CO3 Analyze CE and CC amplifiers. K3

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -

Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
PART A: identification of Components
1. Identification, Specifications, Testing of R, L, C Components (Color Codes),
Potentiometers, Coils, Gang Condensers, Relays, Bread Boards.
2. Identification, Specifications and Testing of active devices, Diodes, BJTs, JFETs, LEDs,
LCDs, SCR, UJT.
3. Study and operation of Ammeters, Voltmeters, Transformers, Analog and Digital
Multimeter, Function Generator, Regulated Power Supply and CRO
PART B: Any 10 of the following experiments are to be conducted
P-N Junction Diode Characteristics for Ge and Si
Experiment 1 Part A: Forward bias (Calculation of forward resistance and cut-in voltage)
Part B: Reverse bias (Calculation of reverse resistance)
Zener Diode Characteristics
Part A: V-I Characteristics-Reverse Bias (Calculation of reverse resistance and
Experiment 2
Breakdown voltage)
Part B: Zener Diode as Voltage Regulator
BJT Characteristics (CE Configuration) and calculation of Ri, Ro, Av and Ai.
Experiment 3 Part A: Input Characteristics
Part B: Output Characteristics
FET Characteristics (CS Configuration) and calculation of rd, gm and μ
Experiment 4 Part A: Drain Characteristics
Part B: Transfer Characteristics
Experiment 5 SCR Characteristics
Experiment 6 UJT Characteristics
Rectifiers
Experiment 7 Part A: Half-wave Rectifier
Part B: Full-wave Rectifier
Rectifiers With C and πFilter
Experiment 8 Part A: Half-wave Rectifier
Part B: Full-wave Rectifier
CRO Applications (Amplitude, Frequency, Phase shift, L-Figures, Gear Wheel
Experiment 9
Patterns)
Experiment 10 Design of CE Amplifier and calculate bandwidth
Experiment 11 Design of CC Amplifier and calculate bandwidth
Experiment 12 Design of CS Amplifier and calculate bandwidth

PART C: Equipment required for Laboratory

1. Boxes
2. Ammeters (Analog or Digital)
3. Voltmeters (Analog or Digital)
4. Active & Passive Electronic Components
5. Regulated Power supplies
6. Analog/Digital Storage Oscilloscopes
7. Analog/Digital Function Generators
8. Digital Multimeters
9. Decade Resistance Boxes/Rheostats
10. Decade Capacitance
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Switching Theory and Logic Design Lab

(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester

Course Category Lab Course Course Code 20EC3L03

Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
Internal Assessment 15
Prerequisites Basics of Digital Electronics Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To verify the truth table of logic gates
2 To verify the function of combinational of logic circuits using truth tables
3 To verify the function of sequential of logic circuits using truth tables

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 To understand the concepts of Logic gates K2
CO2 To understand concepts of combinational circuits. K2
To understand sequential circuits by learning flip-flops and their
CO3 K3
applications.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -

Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: (Any 10 of the following experiments are to be conducted)

Verification of truth tables of Logic gates Two input
Experiment 1
(i) OR (ii) AND (iii) NOR (iv) NAND (v) Exclusive OR (vi) Exclusive NOR
Design a simple combinational circuit with three variables with minimal SOP
Experiment 2
expression and verification of truth table
Experiment 3 Verification of functional table of 3-to-8-line Decoder / Demultiplexer
Experiment 4 4 variable logic function verification using 8 to 1 multiplexer.
Experiment 5 Design full adder circuit and verify its functional table.
Verification of functional tables of
(i) J K Edge triggered Flip – Flop
Experiment 6
(ii) J K Master Slave Flip – Flop
(iii) D Flip – Flop
Design a four-bit ring counter using D Flip – Flops / JK Flip Flop and verify
Experiment 7
the output
Design a four-bit Johnson‘s counter using D Flip-Flops / JK Flip Flops and
Experiment 8
verify output
(a) Design Four-bit buffer register using D Flip – Flops / JK Flip-Flops and
verify output.
Experiment 9
(b) Design four bits shift right register using D Flip-Flops / JK Flip-Flops and
verify output.
Experiment Design a synchronous sequential circuit to convert 16KHz square wave
10 frequency to 2 KHz and sketch the input and output waveforms.
Experiment Design an asynchronous sequential circuit to convert 16KHz square wave
11 frequency to 2 KHz and sketch the input and output waveforms.
Experiment (a) Draw the circuit diagram of a single bit comparator and test the output
12 (b) Testing of 7 segment Display with common cathode.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Interactive Programming
(ECE)
II B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Skill Oriented Course Code 20EC3L04
Course Type Skill Oriented L-T-P-C 0-0-4-2
Internal Assessment 15
Prerequisites Basics of Signals Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To gain knowledge on topics like vector space, basis dimension, inner product, norm and
1
orthogonal basis of signals using programming
To develop relationship for linear systems and response of LTI system using convolution
2
using Programming.
To apply the concepts of Laplace, transform and Z-transform for analyzing continuous and
3
discrete time signals and systems respectively with the help of Programming.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Apply the knowledge of linear algebra topics like vector space, basis,
CO1 K3
dimension, inner product, norm and orthogonal basis to signals.
Develop input output relationship for linear systems and Classify systems
CO2 based on their properties and determine the response of LTI system using K2
convolution
Apply the Laplace transform and Z-transform for analyze of continuous
CO3 K3
and discrete time signals and systems respectively.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -

Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1
3 2 1 1 3 1
CO2
3 2 1 1 3 1
CO3
3 2 1 1 3 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Lecture 1: Introduction to MATLAB.

Lecture 2: MATLAB Operator, functions and Datatypes.
Lecture 3: File types, Arrays and Strings
Lecture 4: Matrix and Array operations on Data
Lecture 5: Practice Sessions
1. Familiarization with MATLAB
a. Matrix Operations & Plotting using MATLAB
b. Relational Operators, Loops & Functions using MATLAB
2. To explore the commutation of even and odd symmetries in a signal with algebraic
operations using MATLAB.
3. Solving First and Second Order differential equations and Integral equations.
4. Generation of different types of Continuous time signals and discrete time signals.
5. To explore the effect of transformation of signal parameters (amplitude-scaling, time-
scaling and time-shifting).
6. To identify a given system as linear or non-linear.
7. Convolution on Continuous Time Signals
8. To explore the time variance and time invariance property of a given system.
9. To explore causality and non-causality property of a system.
10. Generation of Signals & Signal Operations Synthesis of signals using Fourier Series.
11. Implementation of Fourier Transforms, Laplace Transforms, Z-transforms in MATLAB
environment.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Electronic Circuit Analysis

(ECE)
II B. Tech II Semester

Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC4T07

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites EDC, Network Analysis Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will:
1 learn hybrid-pi parameters at high frequency and compare with low frequency parameters.
Learn and understand the purpose of cascading of single stage amplifiers and derive the
2
overall voltage gain.
Analyse the effect of negative feedback on amplifier characteristics and derive the
3
characteristics.
Learn and understand the basic principle of oscillator circuits and perform the analysisof
4
different oscillator circuits.
Compare and analyse different Power amplifiers like Class A, Class B, Class C, ClassAB
5
and other types of amplifiers and analyse different types of tuned amplifier circuits.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Design and analysis of small signal high frequency transistor amplifier
CO1 K3
using BJT and FET.
Design and analysis of multistage amplifiers using BJT and FET and
CO2 K3
Differential amplifier using BJT.
Derive the expressions for frequency of oscillation and condition for
CO3 oscillation of RC and LC oscillators and their amplitude and frequency K3
stability concept.
Know the classification of the power and tuned amplifiers and their
CO4 K2
analysis with performance comparison
CO5 Demonstrate the applications of tuned amplifiers. K2

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -
Medium, 3 – High)
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PSO
PO1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O1 2
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Small Signal High Frequency Transistor Amplifier models:
BJT: Transistor at high frequencies, Hybrid- π common emitter transistor model,
Hybrid π conductance, Hybrid π capacitances, validity of hybrid π model,
determination of high frequency parameters in terms of low-frequency parameters,
UNIT-I
CE short circuit current gain, current gain with resistive load, cut-off frequencies,
frequency response and gain bandwidth product.
FET: Analysis of common Source and common drain Amplifier circuits at high
frequencies.
Multistage Amplifiers: Classification of amplifiers, methods of coupling, cascaded
transistor amplifier and its analysis, analysis of two stage RC coupled amplifier, high
input resistance transistor amplifier circuits and their analysis-Darlington pair
amplifier, Cascode amplifier, Boot-strap emitter follower, Differential amplifier
UNIT-II using BJT.
Feedback Amplifiers: Feedback principle and concept, types of feedback,
classification of amplifiers, feedback topologies, Characteristics of negative
feedback amplifiers, Generalized analysis of feedback amplifiers, Performance
comparison of feedback amplifiers, Method of analysis of feedback amplifiers.
Feedback Amplifiers: Feedback principle and concept, types of feedback,
classification of amplifiers, feedback topologies, Characteristics of negative
UNIT-III
feedback amplifiers, Generalized analysis of feedback amplifiers, Performance
comparison of feedback amplifiers, Method of analysis of feedback amplifiers.
Oscillators: Oscillator principle, condition for oscillations, types of oscillators, RC
phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators with BJT and FET and their analysis,
UNIT-IV
generalized analysis of LC Oscillators, Hartley and Colpitts‘s oscillators using BJT,
Frequency and amplitude stability of oscillators.
Power Amplifiers: Classification of amplifiers (A to H), Class A power Amplifiers,
Class B Push-pull amplifiers, Complementary symmetry push pull amplifier, Class
UNIT-V AB power amplifier, Class-C power amplifier, Thermal stability and Heat sinks.
Tuned Amplifiers: Introduction, Q-Factor, small signal tuned amplifier, capacitance
single tuned amplifier, double tuned amplifiers, staggered tuned amplifiers

TEXT BOOKS
1. Integrated Electronics- J. Mill man and C.C. Halkias, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1972.
Electronic Devices and Circuits Theory – Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky,
2.
Pearson/Prentice Hall, Tenth Edition,2009.
3 Electronic Devices and Integrated Circuits – B.P. Singh, Rekha, Pearson publications, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design – Donald A. Neaman, McGrawHill,2010.
Microelectronic Circuits-Sedra A.S. and K.C. Smith, Oxford University Press,
2.
SixthEdition,2011.
Electronic Circuit Analysis-B.V. Rao, K.R. Rajeswari,P.C.R.Pantulu, K.B.R. Murthy,
3.
Pearson Publications.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Digital IC Applications
(ECE)
II B. Tech II Semester

Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC4T08

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites STLD Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will:
1 Study the concepts of hardware description language for various levels of abstraction
2 Understand coding and designing of Combinational logic circuits using HDL
3 Understand coding and designing of Sequential logic circuits using HDL
4 Understand the concepts of MOS transistor for designing Combinational Logic circuits
5 Understand the concepts of MOS transistor for designing Sequential Logic circuits

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Model logic circuits using hardware description language for digital
CO1 Apply
applications.
Analyze and design basic digital circuits with combinatorial logic circuits
CO2 Analyze
using VHDL.
Analyze and design basic digital circuits with sequential logic circuits
CO3 Analyze
using VHDL.
CO4 Implement Combinational Logic circuits using MOS transistors Apply
CO5 Implementsequential Logic circuits using MOS transistors Apply
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -

Medium, 3 – High)
PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2
CO1 1 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 3 3 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
Hardware Description Languages.
VHDL: Introduction to VHDL, entity declaration, architecture, data-flow, behavioral
and structural style of modeling‘s, data types, data objects, configuration declaration,
package, generic, operators and identifiers, PROCESS, IF, CASE & LOOP statements,
UNIT-I
VHDL libraries.
Verilog HDL: Introduction to Verilog HDL, data types, data operators, module
statement, wire statement, if-else statement, case-end case statement, Verilog syntax
and semantics (qualitative approach)
Combinational Logic Design: Parallel binary adder, carry look ahead adder, BCD
adder, Multiplexers and demultiplexers and their use in combinational logic design,
UNIT-
ALU, digital comparators, parity generators, code converters, priority encoders.
II
(Qualitative approach of designing and modeling the mentioned combinational logic
circuits with relevant digital ICs using HDL)
Sequential Logic Design: Registers, applications of shift registers, ripple or
asynchronous counters, synchronous counters, synchronous and asynchronous
UNIT-
sequential circuits, hazards in sequential circuits. (Qualitative approach of designing
III
and modeling the mentioned sequential logic circuits with relevant digital ICs using
HDL)
Combinational MOS Logic Circuits: Introduction, MOS logic circuits with depletion
nMOS loads: two-input NOR gate, generalized NOR structure with multiple inputs,
transient analysis of NOR gate, two-input NAND gate, generalized NAND structure
UNIT-
with multiple inputs, transient analysis of NAND gate, CMOS logic circuits: CMOS
IV
NOR2 gate, CMOS NAND2 gate, complex logic circuits, complex CMOS logic gates,
AOI and OAI gates, Pseudo-nMOS gates, CMOS full-adder circuit, CMOS
transmission gates (Pass Gates), complementary pass-transistor logic.
Sequential MOS Logic Circuits: Introduction, behavior bistable elements, SR latch
UNIT- circuit, clocked latch and flip-flop circuits: clocked SR latch, clocked JK latch, master-
V slave flip-flop, CMOS D-latch and Edge-triggered flip-flop, Schmitt trigger circuit,
basic principles of pass transistor circuits.

TEXT BOOKS
Digital Design Principles & Practices - John F. Wakerly, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia,
1.
3rdEdition, 2005.
CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits-Analysis and Design – Sung-Mo Kang & Yusuf
2.
Leblebici - Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. VHDL/Verilog Primer - J. Bhasker, Pearson Education/ PHI, 3rd Edition.
Modern Digital Electronics – R.P.Jain - Fourth Edition – Tata McGraw Hill Education
2.
Private Limited, 2010.
Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design - Stephen Brown, ZvonkoVranesic,
3.
McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Control Systems
(ECE)
II B. Tech II Semester

Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC4T09

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Network analysis Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will:
Learn the fundamental concepts of Control systems and mathematical modeling of the system
1
difference between open loop control system and closed loop control system
Learn the representation of various control systems transfer functions in the form of block
2
diagrams and signal flow graphs and obtain a simplified transfer function
Study the time domain specifications and frequency domain specifications Understand the
3
difference between transient response and steady state response
4 Understand the stability of control systems from the S domain analysis
5 Understand the concept of state variable analysis

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Represent the mathematical model of a system and transfer function of
CO1 K1
mechanical & electrical systems.
Determine the response of different servo motors and reduction
CO2 K2
techniques.
CO3 Analyze the stability of different systems. K3
CO4 Determine the frequency response of different order systems. K2
Know the controllability and observability of control systems using state
CO5 K2
space techniques
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

COURSE CONTENT
CONCEPTS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS: Open Loop and closed loop control
systems and their differences. Different examples of control systems, Feed-Back
Characteristics, Effects of feedback.
UNIT-I
MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS: Differential
equations, Impulse Response and transfer functions. Translational and Rotational
mechanical systems
TRANSFER FUNCTION REPRESENTATION:
Transfer Function of DC Servo motor - AC Servo motor- Synchro -transmitter and
UNIT-II Receiver, Block diagram representation of systems considering electrical systems as
examples –Block diagram algebra– Representation by Signal flow graph -
Reduction using mason‘s gain formula.
TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS:
Standard test signals - Time response of first order systems – Characteristic
Equation of Feedback control systems, Transient response of second order systems
- Time domain specifications –Steady state response - Steady state errors and error
UNIT-III
constants.
STABILITY ANALYSIS IN S - DOMAIN:
The concept of stability – Routh‘s stability criterion – qualitative stability and
conditional stability – limitations of Routh‘s stability.
ROOT LOCUS TECHNIQUE:
The root locus concept - construction of root loci-effects of adding poles and zeros
UNIT-IV to G(s)H(s) on the root loci.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS: Introduction, Correlation between time
and frequency response, Polar Plots, Bode Plots, Nyquist Stability Criterion
STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS:
Introduction, Concepts of State, State Variables and State models, State models for
UNIT-V linear continuous-time systems, State variables and linear discrete-time systems,
Solution of state equations and Concepts of Controllability and Observability -
Problem solving.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Automatic Control Systems- 8th edition– by B. C. Kuo–John wiley andson‘s,2003
Control System Engineering- J.Nagarath and M.Gopal, New Age International Publishers,
2.
5th Edition, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Modern Control Engineering- Katsuhiko Ogata, Pearson, 3th Edition, 1998
2. Control Systems– A NagoorKani, 2nd edition, RBA Publications.
Control Systems Engineering- S. Salivahanan, R. Rengaraj, and G. R. Venkata Krishnan,
3.
Pearson, First Impression,2015
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Random Variables and Stochastic Processes

(ECE)
II B. Tech II Semester

Professional Core
Course Category Course Code 20EC4T10

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3

Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Probability Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will learn:
1 basic concepts of probability, theorems along with mathematical solution, type of operations
that can be performed with random variables
2 two random variables, characterization of joint density and distribution functions
3 time axis to the Random Variable
4 frequency domain representation of Random variable
5 responses are studied in terms of convolution, mean, squared values and linear systems

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the concept of a Random variable and its classification K2
CO2 Understand the significance of Moments of a random variable K2
CO3 Differentiate between single and multiple random variables K3
CO4 Understand the concept of a random process and its classification K2
Understand the frequency domain representation of a Random Process,
CO5 K2
and the relevance of a Random process in a communication system
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -
Medium, 3 – High)
PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
CO5 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 2

COURSE CONTENT
THE RANDOM VARIABLE
UNIT-I
Review of Probability: Joint Probability, Conditional Probability, Baye‘s Theorem;
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Definition of a Random Variable, Conditions for a function to be a Random

Variable, Discrete, Continuous and Mixed Random Variable. Distribution and
Density functions of Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Gaussian, Exponential, Rayleigh
and their properties. Conditional distribution, conditional density functions and
their properties.
OPERATION ON ONE RANDOM VARIABLE – EXPECTATIONS
Introduction, Expected Value of a Random Variable, function of a Random
Variable, Moments about the Origin, Central Moments, Variance and Skew,
UNIT-II
Chebychev‘s Inequality, Markov‘s inequality, Moment Generating Function,
Characteristic Function of a Random Variable and their properties, Transformations
of a Random Variable – Monotonic, Non-monotonic
MULTIPLE RANDOM VARIABLES
Vector Random Variables, Joint Distribution Function and its Properties, Marginal
Distribution Functions, Conditional Distribution and Density –Statistical
Independence, Sum of Two Random Variables, Sum of Several Random Variables,
Central Limit Theorem, Equal and Unequal Distributions.
UNIT-III OPERATIONS ON MULTIPLE RANDOM VARIABLES
Expected Value of a function of Random Variables - Joint Moments about the
origin, Joint Central Moments, Joint Characteristic Functions, Joint Gaussian
Random Variables - Two Random Variables, N-Random Variables and their
Properties, Transformations of Multiple Random Variables, Linear Transformations
of Gaussian Random Variables.
RANDOM PROCESSES – TEMPORAL CHARACTERISTICS
The Random Process Concept, Classification of Processes, Deterministic andNon-
deterministic Processes, Distribution and Density Functions, concept of Stationarity
UNIT-IV and Statistical Independence. First-Order, Second- Order, Wide-Sense(N-Order)
and Strict-Sense Stationary Processes, Time Averages and Ergodicity, Mean-
Ergodic Processes, Autocorrelation, Cross-Correlation functions and their
properties. Covariance, Gaussian and Poisson Random Processes.
RANDOM PROCESSES – SPECTRAL CHARACTERISTICS
Power Spectrum and its properties, relationship between Power Spectrum and
Autocorrelation Function, Power Density Spectrum and its Properties, Relationship
between power spectrum and cross correlation function.
LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS
UNIT-V Random Signal response of Linear Systems - system response, convolution, mean
and mean-squared value of system response, autocorrelation function of response,
cross-correlation functions of input and output, spectral characteristics of system
response - power density spectrum, power density spectrums of input and output,
band limited band pass, and narrowband processes, Quadrature components of
noise and their properties.

TEXT BOOKS
Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles - Peyton Z Peebles, 4th
1.
Edition, TMH,2001.
Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes – Athanasios Papoulis and S.
2.
Unnikrishna Pillai, 4th Edition, PHI, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Schaum's Outline of Probability, Random Variables, and Random Processes,1997.
An Introduction to Random Signals and Communication Theory, B.P. Lathi, International
2.
Textbook,1968.
3. Probability Theory and Random Processes, P. Ramesh Babu, McGrawHill,2015.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20

Python Programming

Common to EEE and ECE

Course Category Engineering Course 20CS4T03

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To learn about Python programming language syntax, semantics, and the runtime
1
environment.
2 To be familiarized with universal computer programming concepts like data types,
To be familiarized with general computer programming concepts like conditional
3
execution,
4 To be familiarized with general coding techniques and object-oriented programming

COURSE OUTCOMES BTL

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

CO1 Develop essential programming skills in computer programming K3

concepts like data types, containers.
CO2 Apply the basics of programming in the Python language. K3

CO3 Solve coding tasks related conditional execution, loops. K3

Solve coding tasks related to the fundamental notions and K3
CO4
techniques used in object- oriented programming.
CO5 Make use of Exceptions and GUI interfaces for developing K3

Note: K1- Remembering, K2-Understanding, K3-Applying, K4-Analyzing, K5-Evaluating,K6-

Creating
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2
- Medium, 3 – High)
PO 1 PO 2 PO3 PO 4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO 1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 3

CO 2 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 3

CO 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 3

CO 4 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 3
CO 5 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - 1 3 3
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Introduction: Introduction to Python, Program Development Cycle, Input, Processing,
and Output, Displaying Output with the Print Function, Comments, Variables, Reading
Input from the Keyboard, Performing Calculations, Operators. Type conversions,
Expressions, More about Data Output.
UNIT I Data Types, and Expression: Strings Assignment, and Comment, Numeric Data Types
and Character Sets, Using functions and Modules.
Decision Structures and Boolean Logic: if, if-else, if-elif-else Statements, Nested
Decision Structures, Comparing Strings, Logical Operators, Boolean Variables.
Repetition Structures: Introduction, while loop, for loop, Calculating a Running Total,
Input Validation Loops, Nested Loops.
Control Statement: Definite iteration for Loop Formatting Text for output, Selection if
UNIT II and if else Statement, Conditional Iteration The While Loop Strings and Text Files:
Accessing Character and Substring in Strings, Data Encryption, Strings and Number
Systems, String Methods Text Files.
List and Dictionaries: Lists, Defining Simple Functions, Dictionaries Design with
Function: Functions as Abstraction Mechanisms, Problem Solving with Top Down
UNIT III Design, Design with Recursive Functions, Case Study Gathering
Information from a File System, Managing a Program‘s Namespace, Higher Order
Function.
File Operations: Reading config files in python, Writing log files in python,
UNIT IV
Understanding writelines(), Manipulating file pointer using seek, Programming using
file operations
Object Oriented Programming: Concept of class, object and instances, Constructor,
class attributes and destructors, Real time use of class in live projects, Inheritance ,
overlapping and overloading operators, Adding and retrieving dynamic attributes of
classes, Programming using Oops support Design with Classes: Objects and Classes,
Data modeling Examples, Case Study An ATM, Structuring Classes with Inheritance
and Polymorphism.
Errors and Exceptions: Syntax Errors, Exceptions, Handling Exceptions, Raising
Exceptions,
UNIT V User-defined Exceptions, Defining Clean-up Actions, Redefined Clean-up Actions.
Graphical User Interfaces: The Behavior of Terminal Based Programs and GUI -
Based, Programs, Coding Simple GUI-Based Programs, Other Useful GUIResources.
Programming: Introduction to Programming Concepts with Scratch

TEXT BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Python First Programs, Kenneth. A. Lambert, Cengage.
2. Introduction to Programming Using Python, Y. Daniel Liang, Pearson.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction to Python Programming, Gowrishankar.S, Veena A, CRC Press.
Core Python Programming, Dr. R. Nageswara Rao, ISBN: 9789386052308, 3ed, Wiley
2.
Publication, 2019.
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/python3/python_tutorial.pdf
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Python Programming Laboratory
Common to ECE and EEE

Engineering Course Code 20CS4L03

Course Category
Sciences
Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5

Internal Assessment 15
Prerequisites Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To acquire programming skills in core Python and to acquire Object Oriented Skills in
1 Python

2 To develop the skill of designing Graphical user Interfaces in Python

3 To develop the ability to write database applications in Python

BTL
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Write, Test and Debug Python Programs and Use Conditionals and Loops for K4
CO1 Python Programs
Use functions and represent Compound data using Lists, Tuples and K3
CO2 Dictionaries
K3
CO3 Use various applications using python

Note: K1- Remembering, K2-Understanding, K3-Applying, K4-Analyzing, K5-Evaluating, K6-

Creating

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement

of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT

1. Write a program that asks the user for a weight in kilograms and converts it to
pounds.There are 2.2 pounds in a kilogram.
2. Write a program that uses a for loop to print the numbers 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, . . . , 83, 86, 89.
3. Write a program that asks the user for their name and how many times to print it.
4. Write a program that asks the user for an integer and creates a list that consists of the
factorsof that integer.
5. Write a function called sum_digits that is given an integer num and returns the sum
of thedigits of num.
6. Write a function called first_diffthat is given two strings and returns the first
location in which the strings differ. If the strings are identical, it should return -1.
7. Write a function called number_of_factorsthat takes an integer and returns how many
factorsthe number has.
8. Write a function called is_sortedthat is given a list and returns True if the list is
sorted andFalse otherwise.
9. Write a function called root that is given a number x and an integer n and returns x1/n.
In thefunction definition, set the default value of n to 2.
10. Write a function called primes that is given a number n and returns a list of the first n
primes.Let the default value of n be 100.
11. Write a function called merge that takes two already sorted lists of possibly different
lengths,and merges them into a single sorted list.
• Do this using the sort method. (b) Do this without using the sort method.
12. Write a program that reads a list of temperatures from a file called temps.txt, converts
those temperatures to Fahrenheit, and writes the results to a file called ftemps.txt.
13. Write a Python Program to implement the inheritance
14. Write a program to demonstrate Try/except/else.
15. Write a program to demonstrate try/finally and with/as.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Electronic Circuit Analysis Laboratory

(ECE)
II B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Lab Course Course Code 20EC4L05
Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
InternalAssessment 15
Prerequisites EDC Semester EndExamination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To analyze frequency response of multistage amplifiers.
2 To illustrate the effect of feedback on the performance of the amplifier.
3 To design oscillators and power amplifiers for the given specifications.

COURSE OUTCOMES

Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Analyze the frequency response of multistage amplifiers. K2
CO2 Explain the effect of feedback on the performance of the amplifier. K2
CO3 Design Oscillators and Power amplifiers for the given specifications. K3

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 3
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Any 10 of the following experiments are to be conducted
A) DESIGN AND SIMULATION IN SIMULATION LAB USING MULTISIM:
1. Voltage Series Feedback Amplifier.
2. Current Shunt Feedback Amplifier.
3. RC Phase Shift Oscillator.
4. Colpitts‘s Oscillators.
5. Two Stage RC Coupled Amplifier.
6. Darlington Pair Amplifier.
7. Bootstrapped Emitter Follower
8. Class-ASeries-Fed Power Amplifier.
9. Class B Complimentary Symmetry Amplifier.
10. Single Tuned Voltage Amplifier.
B) TESTING IN THE HARDWARE LABORATORY:
1. Design of Voltage Series Feedback Amplifier.
2. Design of Current Shunt Feedback Amplifier.
3. Design of RC Phase Shift Oscillator.
4. Design of Colpitts‘s Oscillators.
5. Design of Two Stage RC Coupled Amplifier.
6. Design of Darlington Pair Amplifier.
7. Design of Bootstrapped Emitter Follower
8. Design of Class-ASeries-Fed Power Amplifier.
9. Design of Class B Complimentary Symmetry Amplifier.
10. Design of Single Tuned Voltage Amplifier
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Digital IC Applications Laboratory
(ECE)
II B. Tech II Semester

Course Category Lab Course Course Code 20EC4L06

Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
InternalAssessment 15
Prerequisites Digital Electronics Semester EndExamination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To understand and implement the working of digital logic circuits.
2 Understand programming concepts using VHDL/Verilog
3 To design and implement digital systems using logic ICs.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Develop behavioral, data flow and structural models for digitalcircuits. K3
CO2 Simulate VHDL models of digital circuits using CAD tool. K2
CO3 Synthesize sequential and combinational circuits. K3
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2

- Medium, 3 –High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 2 2 2 2

CO2 2 1 2 2 2 2

CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: Conduct any 12 Experiments

1. Realization of Logic Gates
2. Design of Full Adder using 3 modeling systems
3. 3 to 8 Decoder -74138
4. 8 to 3 Priority Encoder - 74148
5. 8 x 1 Multiplexer-74151
6. 4- Bit comparator-7485
7. D Flip-Flop-7474
8. Decade counter -7490
9. Universal Shift Register 74194
10. 8-bit serial in-parallel out and parallel in-serial out
11. Fast In and Fast Out (FIFO)
12. MAC (Multiplier and Accumulator)
13. 8 x 4 ROM
14. ALU Design.

Equipment/Software required:

1. Xilinx Vivado software / Equivalent Industry Standard Software

2. Xilinx Hardware / Equivalent hardware.
3. Personal computer system with necessary software to run the programs and implement.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Internet of Things Applications
(ECE)
II B. Tech II Semester

Course Category Skill Oriented Course Code 20EC4L07

Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-4-2
Internal Assessment 15
Prerequisites Basics of Embedded Systems Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 To understand fundamentals of various technologies of Internet of Things.

To know various communication technologies and the connectivity of devices using web and
2
internet in the IoT environment.
To understand the implementation of IoT by studying case studies like Smart Home,Smart
3
city, etc.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
apply various technologies of Internet of Things to real time
CO1 K2
applications.
apply various communication technologies and connect the devices
CO2 K3
using web and internet in the IoT environment.
CO3 implement IoT to study Smart Home, Smart city, etc K2
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of ProgramOutcomes (1 – Low, 2 -

Medium, 3 – High)
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO1 2 3 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 3 2 1
CO3 1 2 3 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Lecture 1: Introduction to IoT

Lecture 2: Challenges in IoT
Lecture 3: Applications of IoT
1. Familiarization with Arduino/Raspberry Pi and perform necessary software installation.
2. To interface LED/Buzzer with Arduino/Raspberry Pi and write a program to turn ON LED
for 1 sec after every 2 seconds.
3. To interface Push button/Digital sensor (IR/LDR) with Arduino/Raspberry Pi and write a
program to turn ON LED when push button is pressed or at sensor detection.
4. To interface temperature sensor with Arduino/Raspberry Pi and write a program to print
temperature and humidity readings.
5. To interface Organic Light Emitting Diode (OLED) with Arduino/Raspberry Pi
6. To interface Bluetooth with Arduino/Raspberry Pi and write a program to send sensor data
to smartphone using Bluetooth.
7. To interface Bluetooth with Arduino/Raspberry Pi and write a program to turn LED
ON/OFF when ‗1‘/‘0‘ is received from smartphone using Bluetooth.
8. Write a program on Arduino/Raspberry Pi to upload and retrieve temperature and humidity
data to thing speak cloud.
9. 7 Segment Display
10. Analog Input & Digital Output
11. Night Light Controlled & Monitoring System
12. Fire Alarm Using Arduino
13. IR Remote Control for Home Appliances
14. A Heart Rate Monitoring System
15. Alexa based Home Automation System
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Analog ICs and Applications
(ECE)
III B Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC5T11
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Electronics Circuit Analysis Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will:
1 To understand the basic operation &performance parameters of differential amplifiers
and Op-Amp
2 To learn the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers.
3 To understand the analysis & design of different types of active filters using op-amps
4 To learn the internal structure, operation and applications of different analog ICs
5 To Acquire knowledge about Digital to Analog and Analog to Digital Converters

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive
Level
CO1 Understand differential amplifier and Op-Amp concepts K2
CO2 Design circuits using operational amplifiers for various applications. K3
CO3 Analyze and design amplifiers and active filters using Op-amp. K4
CO4 Understand thoroughly the operational amplifiers with linear integrated K2
circuits.
CO5 Understand and Acquire knowledge about Digital to Analog and K2
Analog to Digital Converters.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2

- Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 1 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO3 1 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO4 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO5 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Differential amplifies: Introduction, Differential Amplifier DC and AC Analysis,
Basic Current Mirror Circuit, Improved Version, current repeater circuit, Wilson
current source.
OP-Amp: Block Diagram, Characteristics of Op-Amp Ideal and Practical, DC and
AC Characteristics, Definitions of Input and Output Off-set voltage and currents
UNIT-I slew rate, CMRR, PSRR. etc, Measurements of Op-Amp Parameters. Three
terminal Voltage Regulators 78xx & 79xx Series, current Booster, adjustable
voltage, dual power supply with 78xx & 79xx. Review on IC packages,
technologies and fabrication.
Linear and non-Linear applications of op-amps: Inverting and Non-inverting
amplifier, Integrator and differentiator, Difference amplifier, Instrumentation
UNIT-II amplifier, AC amplifier, V to I, I to V converters, Buffers. Non- Linear function
generators, Comparators, Multivibrators , Triangular and Square wave generators,
Log and Anti log Amplifiers, Precision rectifiers.
Active filters, Analog Multipliers and Modulators: Design & Analysis of Butter
worth active filters–1st order,2nd order LPF,HPF filters. Band pass, Band reject and
UNIT-III
all pass filters..Chebysehev 1st order,2nd order LPF,HPF filters. Four Quadrant
Multiplier, IC 1496, Sample & Hold circuits
Timers : Introduction to 555 timer, functional diagram, Monostable and Astable
operations and applications, Schmitt Trigger;
UNIT-IV PLL - introduction, block schematic, principles and description of individual
blocks, 565 PLL, Applications of PLL – frequency multiplication, frequency
translation, AM, FM & FSK demodulators. Applications of PLL
Digital to Analog and Analog to Digital Converters:
Introduction, basic DAC techniques, weighted resistor DAC, R-2R ladder DAC,
UNIT-V inverted R-2R DAC, and IC 1408 DAC, Different types of ADCs – parallel
Comparator type ADC, counter type ADC, successive approximation ADC and
dual slope ADC. DAC and ADC Specifications, Specifications AD 574 (12-bit
ADC).

TEXT BOOKS
Linear Integrated Circuits - D. Roy Choudhury, New Age International (p)Ltd, 2nd Edition,
1.
2003.
2. Op-Amps & Linear ICs - Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, PHI, 1987.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits - Sanjay Sharma, SK Kataria& Sons;
1.
2nd Edition, 2010
Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits - R.F.Coughlin& Fredrick Driscoll,
2.
PHI, 6th Edition, 2000.
3. Operational Amplifiers & Linear ICs - David A Bell, Oxford Uni. Press, 3rd Edition, 2011.
WEB RESOURCES:
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/1171070
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND TRANSMISSION LINES
III B. Tech I Semester
Course 20EC5T1
Professional Core Course Code
Category 2
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0 -0- 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 25
Vector calculus ,Review of Co-
Semester End Examination 75
ordinate Systems
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To study the transmission line parameters, transmission line equations, infinite line and
1
lossless transmission lines
To study the input impedance relations, λ/4, λ /2, λ/8 lines and their impedance
2
transformations, Smith Chart, Stub Matching.
To study the concepts of electric fields, energy density, Maxwell‘s two equations for
3
electrostatic fields, and Capacitance.
To study the concepts in magnetic fields, and Maxwell‘s equations in different final form and
4
boundary conditions.
To study the electromagnetic waves in conducting and perfect dielectric media, wave
5
propagation, polarization, and Poynting Theorem.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Calculate the voltage and current, derive the expressions for input
CO1 K3
impedance of transmission lines, phase and group velocities.
Interpret the short circuit and open circuit lines, calculate reflection K3
CO2
coefficient, VSWR.
Calculate electric field intensity, electric flux density using Maxwell‘s K2
CO3
equations.
CO4 Interpret the Maxwell‘s equations for magnetic fields, transformer EMF K2

Gain the knowledge of uniform plane wave characteristics in various K3

CO5
media, reflection and refraction of plane waves.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2
PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
1 0 1 2
CO 1
3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1
1
CO
3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2
2
CO
3 3 2 2 1 2 3
3
CO
3 3 2 2 1 2 3
4
CO
3 3 3 2 1 2 2
5
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Transmission Lines-I: Types, Parameters, T & π Equivalent Circuits, Transmission
Line Equations, Primary & Secondary Constants, Expressions for Characteristic
UNIT I
Impedance, Propagation Constant, Phase and Group Velocities, Infinite Line,
Lossless lines, distortion less lines, Illustrative Problems
Transmission Lines– II: Input Impedance Relations, SC and OC Lines, Reflection
Coefficient, VSWR. Low loss radio frequency lines and UHF Transmission lines,
UNIT II UHF Lines as Circuit Elements; Impedance Transformations, λ/8,λ/4 and λ /2 Lines –
. Smith Chart – Construction and Applications, Quarter wave transformer, Single
Stub Matching, Illustrative Problems.
Electrostatics: Coulomb‘s Law, Electric Field Intensity, Electric Flux Density,
Gauss Law and Applications, Electric Potential, Maxwell‘s Two Equations for
UNIT
Electrostatic Fields, Energy Density, Illustrative Problems. Convection and
III
Conduction Currents, Dielectric Constant, Poisson‘s and Laplace‘s Equations;
Capacitance – Parallel Plate, Coaxial Capacitors, Illustrative Problems
Magneto Statics: Biot-Savart Law, Ampere‘s Circuital Law and Applications,
Magnetic Flux Density, Maxwell‘s Two Equations for Magneto static Fields,
Magnetic Scalar and Vector Potentials, Forces due to Magnetic Fields, Ampere‘s
UNIT Force Law, Inductances and Magnetic Energy. Illustrative Problems,
IV Maxwell‘s Equations (Time Varying Fields): Faraday‘s Law and Transformer EMF,
Inconsistency of Ampere‘s Law and Displacement Current Density, Maxwell‘s
Equations in Different Final Forms and Word Statements, Conditions at a Boundary
Surface, Illustrative Problems.
EM Wave Characteristics: Wave Equations for Conducting and Perfect Dielectric
Media Uniform Plane Waves – Definition, All Relations Between E & H, Sinusoidal
Variations, Wave Propagation in Lossy dielectrics, lossless dielectrics, free space,
wave propagation in good conductors, skin depth, Illustrative Problems. Reflection
UNIT V
and Refraction of Plane Waves – Normal and Oblique Incidences, for both Perfect
Conductor and Perfect Dielectrics, Brewster Angle, Critical Angle and Total Internal
Reflection, Surface Impedance, Poynting Vector and Poynting Theorem, Illustrative
Problems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Elements of Electromagnetic–Matthew N.O.Sadiku, Oxford Univ. Press,3rded.,2001.
Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems–E.C.Jordan and K.G.Balmain,
2.
PHI,2ndEdition,2000.
Electromagnetic Waves and Transmission Line—Y Mallikarjuna Reddy, Universities
3.
Press, 2015
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines–GSN Raju, Pearson Education
Engineering Electromagnetic –William H. Hayt Jr. and John A.Buck, TMH, 7 th ed.,
2.
2006.
Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines : G SasiBhushanaRao,
3.
WileyIndia2013.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
III B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional core Course Code 20EC5T13
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Signals and systems
Semester End Examination 70
Probability theory
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
Students undergoing this course are expected to
1 Familiarize with the fundamentals of analog communication systems.
2 Familiarize with various techniques for analog modulation and demodulation of signals
Familiarize with basic techniques for generating and demodulating various pulse modulated
3
signals.
4 Understand the pulse digital modulation systems such as PCM, DPCM and DM.
5 Categorize various digital modulation techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Differentiate various Amplitude modulation and demodulation schemes
CO1 K2
and their spectral characteristics techniques
Understand the performance of Frequency modulation and demodulation K2
CO2
schemes and their spectral characteristics techniques
CO3 Distinguish the performance of pulse digital modulation techniques K4

CO4 Interpret digital modulation techniques like ASK, FSK, PSK etc. K2
Evaluate the performance of digital modulation techniques for coherent
CO5 K5
andnon coherent detection.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PSO2

CO1 3 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1

COURSE CONTENT
AMPLITUDE MODULATION ,DSB& SSB MODULATION:
UNIT
AMPLITUDE MODULATION : Introduction to communication system, Need for
I
modulation, Frequency Division Multiplexing , Amplitude Modulation, Definition,
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time domain and frequency domain description, single tone modulation, power
relations in AM waves, Generation of AM waves, square law Modulator, Switching
modulator, Detection of AM Waves; Square law detector, Envelope detector.
DSB & SSB MODULATION: Double side band suppressed carrier modulators, time
domain and frequency domain description, Generation of DSBSC Waves, Balanced
Modulators, Ring Modulator, Coherent detection of DSB-SC Modulated waves,
COSTAS Loop. Frequency domain description, Frequency discrimination method for
generation of AM SSB Modulated Wave, Time domain description, Phase
discrimination method for generating AMSSB Modulated waves. Demodulation of
SSB Waves.
VSB MODULATION & ANGLE MODULATION:
VESTIGIAL SIDE BAND MODULATION: Frequency description, Generation of
VSB Modulated wave, Time domain description, Envelope detection of a VSB Wave
pulse Carrier, Comparison of AM Techniques, Applications of different AM Systems.
UNIT
ANGLE MODULATION: Basic concepts, Frequency Modulation: Single tone
II
frequency modulation, Spectrum Analysis of Sinusoidal FM Wave, Narrowband FM,
Wideband FM, Constant Average Power, Transmission bandwidth of FM Wave-
Generation of FM Waves, Detection of FM Waves: Balanced Frequency discriminator,
Zero crossing detector, Phase lockedloop. Comparison of FM & AM.
PULSE ANALOG & DIGITAL MODULATION:
PULSE MODULATION: Types of Pulse modulation, PAM (Single polarity, double
polarity) PWM & PPM Generation & Detection, Time Division Multiplexing, TDM
Vs FDM.
UNIT
PULSE DIGITAL MODULATION: Elements of digital communication systems,
III
advantages of digital communication systems, Elements of PCM: (Sampling,
Quantization & Encoding), Quantization error, Companding in PCM systems.
Differential PCM systems (DPCM), Delta modulation, its draw backs, adaptive delta
modulation, comparison of PCM and DM systems, noise in PCM and DM systems.
DIGITALMODULATIONTECHNIQUES:
Introduction, Amplitude Shift Keying, Frequency Shift Keying, Phase Shift Keying,
UNIT
Differential Phase Shift Keying, DEPSK,QPSK, M-ary Phase Shift Keying, M-ary
IV
Amplitude Shift Keying, M-ary Frequency Shift Keying, similarity between digital
modulation techniques.
DATA TRANSMISSION:
UNIT Base band signal receiver, probability of error, the optimum filter, matched filter,
V probability of error using matched filter, coherent reception, non-coherent detection of
FSK. Calculation of error probability of ASK, BPSK, BFSK, QPSK.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Principles of Communication Systems-Simon Haykin, John Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2007
2. Digital communications- Simon Haykin, JohnWiley,2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Communication Systems – B P Lathi, B S Publication, 2006.
2. Digital and Analog Communication Systems - Sam Shanmugam, John Wiley, 2005.
3. Communication Systems (Analog And Digital) | Sanjay Sharma, S.K.Kataria& Sons, 2013
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Antenna and Wave Propagation
(ECE)
III B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC5T14
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites EMTL Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 Study antenna fundamentals, Obtain antenna parameters for wire antenna.
2 Use Principle of Pattern Multiplication for various arrays
3 Study Broad band antennas.
4 Study Reflectors, VHF, UHF and Microwave antennas
5 Understand radio wave propagation.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand antenna fundamentals, Obtain antenna parameters for wire K2
antenna.
CO2 Apply knowledge of Principle of Pattern Multiplication to various arrays K3
CO3 Apply knowledge of antenna fundamentals to Broad band antennas K3
Apply knowledge of antenna fundamentals to Reflectors, VHF, UHF and
CO4 K3
Microwave antennas
CO5 Infer the characteristics of radio wave propagation in the atmosphere. K2
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2

- Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 2 1 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 1 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO5 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS: Introduction, Radiation Mechanism – single wire,
2 wire, dipoles, Current Distribution on a thin wire antenna. Antenna Parameters -
Radiation Patterns, Patterns in Principal Planes, Main Lobe and Side Lobes, Beam
UNIT I widths, Polarization, Beam Area, Radiation Intensity, Beam Efficiency, Directivity,
Gain and Resolution, Antenna Apertures, Aperture Efficiency, Effective Height-
illustrated Problems. Antenna Theorems – Applicability and Proofs for equivalence
of directional characteristics.
THIN LINEAR WIRE ANTENNAS: Retarded Potentials, Radiation from Electric
Dipole, Quarter wave Monopole and Half wave Dipole – Current Distributions,
UNIT II Evaluation of Field Components, Power Radiated, Radiation Resistance, Beam widths,
Directivity, Effective Area and Effective Height, Small Loops – Characteristics,
Comparison of far fields of small loop and short dipole.
ANTENNA ARRAYS: 2 element arrays – different cases, Principle of Pattern
Multiplication, N element Uniform Linear Arrays – Broadside, End-fire Arrays,
UNIT Derivation of their characteristics and comparison- Illustrative problems Folded
III Dipoles and their characteristics, Arrays with Parasitic Elements, Yagi-Uda Array,
Illustrative problems.
NON-RESONANT RADIATORS: Introduction, Long wire TWA-patterns,
Broadband Antennas: Helical Antennas –Significance, Geometry, basic properties,
Design considerations for monofilar helical antennas in Axial Mode and Normal
Modes (Qualitative Treatment).
VHF, UHF AND MICROWAVE ANTENNAS: Reflector Antennas - Flat Sheet
and Corner Reflectors, Paraboloidal Reflectors – Geometry, characteristics, types of
UNIT feeds, F/D Ratio, Spill Over, Back Lobes, Aperture Blocking, Off-set Feeds,
IV Cassegrain Feeds. Micro strip Antennas-Introduction, Features, Advantages and
Limitations. Rectangular Patch Antennas –Geometry and Parameters, Impact of
different parameters on characteristics. Horn Antennas – Types, Optimum Horns,
Design Characteristics of Pyramidal Horns; Lens Antennas – Geometry, Features,
Dielectric Lenses and Zoning, Applications.
WAVE PROPAGATION: Concepts of Propagation – frequency ranges and types of
propagations. Ground Wave Propagation–Characteristics, Wave Tilt, Flat and
UNIT V Spherical Earth Considerations. Space Wave Propagation – Mechanism, LOS and
Radio Horizon. Tropospheric Wave Propagation – Radius of Curvature of path,
Effective Earth‘s Radius, Effect of Earth‘s Curvature, Field Strength Calculations.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Antennas for All Applications – John D.Kraus and Ronald J.Marhefka, TMH, 3rd
Edition,2003.
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems – E.C.Jordan and K.G.Balmain,PHI,2nd
Edition, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Antenna Theory - C.A. Balanis, John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.
2. Antennas and wave propagation- Sisir K Das, Annapurna Das, TMH,2013
3. Antennas and Wave Propagation, G. S. N. Raju, Pearson Education, 2006.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

III B. Tech I Semester
Course
Program Elective Course Code 20EC5T15
Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Electronic devices and Internal Assessment 30
Circuits, Semester End Examination 70
IC Applications Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The student will study

Different types of electronic measuring instruments‘ working principle, errors,
1
specifications etc
2 Various types of signal generators, wave analyzers and their working principle

3 The working principles of different types of CRO‘s and their applications

Working principles of various bridges and the measurement of resistance, inductance,
4
capacitance and frequency.
5 Active and passive transducers and measuring physical parameters using transducers

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
select the instrument for specific measurements and also understand,
CO1 K2
estimate errors in measurements
Acquire the knowledge on signal generators and wave analyzers for
CO2 K2
different applications
CO3 Understand the operation of different oscilloscopes K2
Apply the suitable bridge for measurement of resistance, capacitance,
CO4 K3
inductance and frequency.
Apply suitable transducer, to measure the physical parameters
CO5 K3

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 2 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO5 2 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Performance characteristics of instruments:
Static characteristics, Dynamic Characteristics, Types of errors in measurements and
their analysis, Design of multi-range AC, DC meters (voltmeter &ammeter) and
UNIT I
ohmmeter(series &shunt type) using D‘arsonval movement. True rms meter, Digital
volt meters (Ramp type, dual slope type, Integrating type, Successive Approximation
type), General specifications of DVM
SIGNAL GENERATORS: Fixed and variable AF oscillators, AF sine and square
wave signal generators, Function Generators, Pulse generator, Random noise
UNIT II generator, Sweep generator, Modern Laboratory signal generator.
Wave Analyzers: Frequency selective wave analyzer, heterodyne Wave analyzer,
Harmonic Distortion Analyzers, Spectrum Analyzers, Digital Fourier Analyzers
OSCILLO SCOPES: Basic Principle, CRT features, Vertical amplifiers, Horizontal
deflection system, Triggered Sweep CRO, Triggered Pulse Circuit, delay line, sync
selector circuits, simple CRO, triggered sweep CRO, Dual beam CRO, Dual trace
UNIT
oscilloscope, sampling oscilloscope, storage oscilloscope, digital readout
III
oscilloscope, digital storage oscilloscope, Applications of CRO Lissajous method of
frequency measurement, standard specifications of oscilloscopes, probes for
osci ll oscopes - Active and Passive, attenuator type.
BRIDGES: Wheat stone bridge, measurement of very low resistance, Measurement
of inductance- Maxwell‘s bridge, Anderson bridge. Measurement of capacitance-
UNIT
Schering Bridge, Wien Bridge, Errors and precautions in using bridges, Q-meter,
IV
principle of operation, Measurement of impedance and Characteristic impedance
using Q-meter
TRANSDUCERS: Active and passive transducers - Resistance, Capacitance,
Inductance, Strain gauges, Piezo Electric transducers, Resistance Thermometers,
UNIT V Thermocouples, Thermistors, Sensistors, LVDT, Temperature transducers, pressure
transducers, Measurement of physical parameters temperature, force, pressure,
velocity, acceleration and displacement.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Electronic instrumentation - H.S.Kalsi, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004
Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques – A.D. Helfrick and
2.
W.D. Cooper, 5th Edition, PHI, 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements - David A. Bell, 2nd Edition PHI, 2003
Electronic Test Instruments, Analog and Digital Measurements - Robert A.Witte, 2nd
2.
Edition, Pearson Education., 2004
Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments- R.K.Rajput, S.Chand publications,
3.
2008
WEB RESOURCES
1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/108105064
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION

(ECE)
III B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC5T16
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
STLD Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 Discuss the basic concepts and structure of computers &different types ofinstructions
2 Explain different types of addressing modes and architectures
Understand the basics of hardwired and micro-programmed control of the CPU, pipelined
3
architectures , Hazards and Superscalar Operations.
Estimate the performance of various classes of Memories, build large memories using
4
small memories for better performance
5 Understand various modes of data transfer and multiprocessing systems

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Examine functional units and instruction set of computer K3

CO2 Know the different type of Architectures K4

Design micro programmed control unit and know the techniques for
CO3 K4
improving computer performance
CO4 Learn memory systems & its management K2

CO5 Demonstrate the interfacing of various I/O devices & multi processors K2
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO4 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - -
CO5 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - -
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS
Structure and function, Designing for performance, Components of a computer
system, Arithmetic and Logic Unit
UNIT I TYPES OF INSTRUCTIONS
Instruction types - Data transfer and manipulation instructions, Arithmetic
instructions, Logic instructions, Shift and Rotate instructions, conditional branches
with various examples
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
Instruction formats, Addressing modes, Instruction sequencing, Instruction set
UNIT II architecture design and hardware/software interface, Basic I/O operations
&load/store architectures. CISC and RISC architectures. Organization of single-
and multi-cycle RISC microprocessors Data path and control logic.
CONTROL UNIT
Control memory, Address sequencing, computer configuration,
microinstructions, micro program sequencing, wide branch addressing, and
microinstructions with next-address field. Symbolic microinstructions,
symbolic micro program, control unit operations, Design of control unit
UNIT III
TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING COMPUTER PERFORMANCE
Pipelining and interleaving, pipelining impact on the ISA and system architecture,
speed up achieved through pipelining, pipeline hazards and forwarding, interlocks,
and branch delay slots. Parallel processing, RISC pipeline, vector processing and
array processing, Super scalar design
MEMORY SYSTEMS AND MANAGEMENT
Basic memory circuits, ROM, RAM, EEPROM, Flash Memory, Cache memory,
memory hierarchies, Caches- organization, size, implementation and Improve
memory performance with caches, mapping functions, interleaving, replacement
UNIT IV algorithm, write policy and no of caches. Secondary storage: Magnetic Hard Disk,
Optical Disks, Solid State Disks and Arrays, Redundant arrays of inexpensive
disks (RAID).
Virtualization and sharing computers – Memory management, virtual memory,
time sharing and process management
INPUT/OUTPUT ORGANIZATION AND MULTI PROCESSING
SYSTEMS
Peripheral devices, I/O devices/modules –Access, interfaces, asynchronous data
transfer, modes of transfer – programmed, interrupt driven and DMA. Interrupt
UNIT V hardware – Enabling and disabling, handling multiple devices, I/O processors,
Data communication processor. Buses – Synchronous Bus, Asynchronous bus,
Interface Circuits, Standard I/O interface – PCI, USB etc. Multiprocessing systems
– Multiprocessor and its characteristics, interconnection structures for
multiprocessors, inter processor communication and synchronization

TEXT BOOKS
1. Computer Organization, Carl Hamacher, ZvonksVranesic, SafeaZaky, 5/e, McGraw Hill.
2. Computer System Architecture, M.Morris Mano, 3/e, Pearson/PHI
3.
Computer Organization and Architecture – William Stallings, 6/e, Pearson/PHI
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Structured Computer Organization – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, 4/e, PHI/Pearson
Fundamentals or Computer Organization and Design, - SivaraamaDandamudi Springer Int.
2.
Edition
3. Computer Organization and Architecture-John P.Hayes, 5th edition, MC GrawHill
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SURVEYING
OPENELECTIVE

Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20CE5T01

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
------------ Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSEOBJECTIVES
1 Introduce the students to basic principles of surveying.
2 Demonstrate the basic surveying skills.
3 Perform various methods of linear and angles measurements.
4 Enable the students to use surveying equipment‘s

5 Integrate the knowledge and produce topographical map.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Illustrate the fundamentals in chain and plane table surveying. K2

CO2 Identify the angles on filed by compass survey. K2

CO3 Apply knowledge of leveling in surveying. K2

Measure the horizontal and vertical angles by using Theodolite and Total
CO4 K3
Station instruments.
CO5 Estimate the volume and area of irregular boundaries of filed. K3
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- 3 -- -- 2 3 --
CO2 3 3 1 2 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 3 3 --
CO3 2 -- -- 3 -- -- -- -- 3 -- -- -- 2 --
CO4 2 3 1 3 3 -- -- -- 3 -- -- 3 3 --
CO5 3 3 3 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
INTRODUCTION: Definition-Uses of surveying, Objectives, Principles and
Classifications of Surveying – Errors in survey measurements.
UNIT I DISTANCEMEASUREMENTCONVENTIONS AND METHODS: Use of chain
and tape, Errors and corrections to linear measurements, overview of plane table
surveying
COMPASS SURVEY: Definition- Principles of Compass survey - Meridians,
UNIT II Azimuths and Bearings, declination. Computation of angle - Purpose and types of
Traversing - traverse adjustments – Local attraction.
LEVELING: Concept and Terminology, Levelling Instruments and their Temporary
UNIT
and permanent adjustments- method of levelling. CONTOURING: Characteristics
III
and uses of contours- methods of conducting contour surveys and their plotting.
THEODOLITE: Theodolite, description, principles - uses – temporary and permanent
adjustments, measurement of horizontal and vertical angles. Principles of Electronic
Theodolite – Omitted Measurements. Introduction to geodetic surveying - Total
UNIT Station and Global Positioning System. CURVES: Types of curves, design and
IV setting out. TACHEOMETRIC SURVEYING: Stadia and tangential methods of
Tachometry. MODERN SURVEYING METHODS: Principle and types of E.D.M.
Instruments, Total station advantages and Applications. Introduction to Global
Positioning System.
COMPUTATION OF AREAS AND VOLUMES: Computation of areas along
irregular boundaries and regular boundaries. Embankments and cutting for a level
UNIT V
section and two- level sections with and without transverse slopes, determination of
the capacity of reservoir, volume of barrow pits

TEXT BOOKS
Surveying (Vol No.1, 2 &3) by B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain –
1.
Laxmi Publications (P) ltd, New Delhi.
2. Text book of Surveying by C. Venkataramaiah, University press, India (P) limited.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Text book of Surveying by S.K. Duggal (Vol No. 1&2), Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.
1.
Ltd. New Delhi.
2. Text book of Surveying by Arora (Vol No. 1&2), Standard Book House, Delhi.
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107122/1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Renewable Energy Engineering
(Open Elective – I offered to other departments)
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EE5T13
Courses
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites NIL Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To study the solar radiation data, equivalent circuit of PV cell and its I-V & P-V
1
characteristics
2 To understand the concept of Wind Energy Conversion & its applications
3 To study the principles of biomass and geothermal energy
To understand the principles of Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC), motion of
4
waves and power associated with it
To study the various chemical energy sources such as fuell cell and hydrogen energy
5
along with their operation and equivalent circuit

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive
Level
Analyze solar radiation data, extra-terrestrial radiation, radiation on
CO1 K4
earth‘s surface and solar Energy Storage
CO2 Illustrate the components of wind energy systems K3
CO3 Illustrate the working of biomass, digesters and Geothermal plants K3
Demonstrate the principle of Energy production from OTEC, Tidal
CO4 K3
and Waves
Evaluate the concept and working of Fuel cells & MHD power
CO5 K4
generation
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO4 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Solar Energy: Introduction - Renewable Sources - prospects, Solar radiation at the
Earth Surface - Equivalent circuit of a Photovoltaic (PV) Cell - I-V & P-V
UNIT 1 Characteristics - Solar Energy Collectors: Flat plate Collectors, concentrating
collectors - Solar Energy storage systems and Applications: Solar Pond - Solar
water heating - Solar Green house.
Wind Energy: Introduction - basic Principles of Wind Energy Conversion, the
nature of Wind - the power in the wind - Wind Energy Conversion - Site selection
UNIT 2
considerations - basic components of Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS) -
Classification - Applications.
Biomass and Geothermal Energy:
Biomass: Introduction - Biomass conversion technologies - Photosynthesis, factors
affecting Bio digestion - classification of biogas plants - Types of biogas plants -
UNIT 3
selection of site for a biogas plant
Geothermal Energy: Introduction, Geothermal Sources – Applications -
operational and Environmental problems.
Energy From oceans, Waves & Tides:
Oceans: Introduction - Ocean Thermal Electric Conversion (OTEC) – methods -
prospects of OTEC in India.
UNIT 4
Waves: Introduction - Energy and Power from the waves - Wave Energy
conversion devices.
Tides: Basic principle of Tide Energy -Components of Tidal Energy.
UNIT 5 Chemical Energy Sources:
Fuel Cells: Introduction - Fuel Cell Equivalent Circuit - operation of Fuel cell -
types of Fuel Cells - Applications.
Hydrogen Energy: Introduction - Methods of Hydrogen production - Storage and
Applications
Magneto Hydro Dynamic (MHD) Power generation: Principle of Operation -
Types.

TEXT BOOKS
1 G.D.Rai, Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publications, 2011
2 John Twidell & Tony Weir, Renewable Energy Sources, Taylor & Francis, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 S.P.Sukhatme & J.K.Nayak, Solar Energy-Principles of Thermal Collection and
Storage, TMH, 2011
2 John Andrews & Nick Jelly, Energy Science- principles, Technologies and Impacts,
Oxford, 2nd edition, 2013
3 Shoba Nath Singh, Non- Conventional Energy Resources, Pearson Publications, 2015
WEB RESOURCES (Suggested)
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/121/106/121106014/
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103/107/103107157/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
III Year I Semester
OPERATIONS RESEARCH
(for CE, EEE, ECE, IT)

Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20ME5T21

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites NIL Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 Applications of operations research through LPP.
2 Formulation of objective function through transportation and assignment problems.
How to sequence the jobs and machines while processing and Replacement of
3
machine/equipment.
4 The applications of waiting line problems and operations research through DPP.
5 Deterministic and stochastic models.
COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Formulate the objective function by linear programming problem and
CO1 K3
solution through various models.
Evaluate optimal solutions to the objective function with the knowledge
CO2 K3
of transportation and assignment problems.
CO3 Apply the sequencing of the jobs on a machine and items replacements K4
CO4 Apply the principle of dynamic programming and service rate. K3
Apply the inventory models in balancing the stock and demand ratio for K3
CO5
profits
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - 3 - 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 3 - - - - - 3 - 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 1 3 - - - - - 3 - 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - 3 - 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 3 - - - - - 3 - 3 2

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION: Development – definition– characteristics and phases – types of operation
research models – applications.
ALLOCATION: Linear programming problem formulation – graphical solution – simplex
method – artificial variables techniques -two–phase method, big-M method – duality principle

UNIT II
TRANSPORTATION PROBLEM: Formulation – optimal solution, unbalanced transportation
problem – degeneracy,
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASSIGNMENT PROBLEM – formulation – optimal solution - variants of assignment
problem- travelling salesman problem.

UNIT III
SEQUENCING – Introduction – flow –shop sequencing –n jobs through two machines – n jobs
through three machines – job shop sequencing – two jobs through ‗m‘ machines.
REPLACEMENT: Introduction – replacement of items that deteriorate with time – when
money value is not counted and counted – replacement of items that fail completely, group
replacement.

UNIT IV
WAITING LINES: Introduction – single channel – poison arrivals –exponential service times –
with infinite population and finite population models– multichannel – poison arrivals –
exponential service times with infinite population single channel poison arrivals.
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Introduction – Bellman‘s principle of optimality –
applications of dynamic programming- capital budgeting problem – shortest path problem –
linear programming problem.

UNIT V
INVENTORY: Introduction – single item – deterministic models –purchase inventory models
with one price break and multiple price breaks – shortages are not allowed – stochastic models –
demand may be discrete variable or continuous variable – instantaneous production.
Instantaneous demand and continuous demand and no set up cost. ABC & VED Analysis.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Operations Research / S.D.Sharma-Kedarnath
2. Operations Research/S Kalavathy / Vikas Publishers
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Operations Research / A.M.Natarajan, P. Balasubramani, A.Tamilarasi / Pearson
Education.
2. Operations Research / R.Pannerselvam,PHI Publications.
3. Operations Research / Wagner/ PHI Publications.
4. Operations Research / DS Cheema/University Science Press
5. Operations Research / Ravindran, Philips, Solberg / Wiley publishers.
WEB RESOURCES
1. http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/fundamentals-of-operations-research.html
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110106062
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entrepreneurship
(ECE)
III B Tech I Semester
Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20HM5T03
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive
Level
CO1 Understand different Entrepreneurial traits. K2
CO2 Identify and compare the financial institutions supporting K3
entrepreneurship.
CO3 Understand the functioning and problems faced by MSMEs (Micro Small K2
Medium Enterprises)
CO4 Identify Entrepreneurial opportunities for women. K3
CO5 Analyze different market, technical factors and prepare a project report K3
based on guidelines.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2

- Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 2 1 3 3 2 1
CO2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 2 3 1 1 2
CO3 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 1 1 0 3 1 2
CO4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 1 1 0 3 1 2
CO5 0 1 1 0 0 1 2 3 1 3 3 3 2 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Unit – I Introduction to Entrepreneurship
Introduction to Entrepreneurship: Definition of Entrepreneur Entrepreneurial Traits.
Entrepreneur vs. Manager, Creating and Starting the venture: Sources of new ideas,
UNIT-I methods of generating ideas, creative problem solving – Writing Business Plan,
Evaluating Business Plans.
UNIT-II Institutional and financial support to Entrepreneurship
Institutional/financial support: Schemes and functions of Directorate of Industries,
IFCI, District Industries Centers (DICs), Industrial Development Corporation (IDC),
State Financial Corporation (SFCs), Small Scale Industries Development
Corporations (SSIDCs). Khadi and Village Industries Commission (KVIC),
UNIT-II Technical Consultancy Organization (TCO), Small Industries Service Institute
(SISI), National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC), Small Industries
Development Bank of India (SIDBI).(short answers only), Start up culture.
UNIT III Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises:
Importance and role of MSMEs in economic development, Types of MSMEs,
Policies and their support to MSMEs growth and growth strategies.
UNIT-III Sickness in small business and remedies – small entrepreneurs in International
business.
Unit – IV Women Entrepreneurship and Start up Culture
Role & importance, profile of women Entrepreneur, problems of women
Entrepreneurs, women Entrepreneurship Development in India -Steps taken by the
UNIT-IV Government to promote women entrepreneurship in India, Associations supporting
women entrepreneurs. Successful Entrepreneurs (case studies).
Unit-V: Project Formulation and Appraisal
Preparation of Project Report –Content; Guidelines for Report preparation – Project
Appraisal techniques –economic – Steps Analysis; Financial Analysis; Market
UNIT-V Analysis; Technical Feasibility.

TEXT BOOKS
Vasanth Desai – Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship and Small business management –
1.
Himalaya publishing house – 2019
2. Robert Hisrich, Michael Peters, Dean A. Sheperd, Sabyasachi Sinha – Entrepreneurship -
TMH - 2020.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Vasant Desai – Entrepreneurship Management - Himalaya Publishing House- 2018.

Robert J.Calvin - Entrepreneurial Management – TMH - 2009.

2.
3. Gurmeet Naroola - The entrepreneurial Connection – TMH - 2009.
4. ArunaKaulgud - Entrepreneurship Management - Vikas publishing house - 2009.
WEB RESOURCES:
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105067/50
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Analog ICs and Applications LAB
(ECE)
III B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC5L06
Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
Internal Assessment Semester 25
Prerequisites Electronics Circuit Analysis End Examination 50
Total Marks 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES
The student will learn:
1 the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers (741)
2 familiar with theory and applications of 555 timers.
3 design analog circuits of different applications using PLL and VCO.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 have a thorough understanding of operational amplifier K2
CO2 to design circuits using operational amplifiers for various applications. K4
CO3 Demonstrate their knowledge by designing analog circuits K3
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
List of Experiments to be conducted:
1. Study of ICs – IC 741, IC 555, IC 565, IC 566, IC 1496 – functioning, Parameters
and Specifications
2. OP AMP Applications – Inverting amplifier, non-inverting amplifier and voltage follower.
3. Design an Adder, Subtractor using Op-Amp for given specifications
4. Design Inverting and Non-Inverting Comparator using-Amp.
5. Design an Integrator and Differentiator using Op-Amp for given specifications.
6. Design an LPF and HPF (first order) using Op-Amp and obtain its frequency response
and bandwidth.
7. Design an Oscillator Circuits – Phase Shift and Wien Bridge Oscillators usingOp-Amp
8. Design a Function Generator using multipleOp-Amp.
9. ADC using IC 0809 & DAC using IC 741 circuits. Using 555 timer.
10. Obtain lock range and capture range for the given Phased Locked Loop IC.
11. Frequency translation using Phased Locked Loop.
12. Design Voltage Controlled Oscillator for given IC and obtain frequency conversionfactor.

Equipment required for Laboratories:

1. RPS
2. CRO
3. Function Generator
4. Multi Meters
5. IC Trainer Kits (Optional)
6. Bread Boards
7. Components:- IC741, IC555, IC565, IC1496, IC723, 7805, 7809, 7912 and other essential
components.
8. Analog IC Tester
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY
(ECE)
III B.Tech, I Semester
Course Category Lab Course Course Code 20EC5L07

Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5

Internal Assessment 15
Prerequisites EDC Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 various modulation and demodulation techniques of analog modulation
2 verification of pulse modulation techniques
3 the various digital modulation techniques.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Analyze various Analog modulation & demodulation techniques. K4
CO2 Analyze the performance of pulse modulation techniques K4
Interpret the variation in digital modulation techniques like ASK, FSK,
CO3 K2
PSK etc.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - 2 -
CO2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2 -
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1 2 -
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Any 10 of the following experiments are to be conducted
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Ten experiments to be done - The students have to calculate
the relevant parameters) - (a. Hardware, b. MATLAB Simulink, c. MATLAB
Communication tool box)
1. Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation.
2. AM - DSB SC - Modulation & Demodulation.
3. Diode Detector
4. Frequency Modulation & Demodulation.
5. Verification of Sampling Theorem.
6. Pulse Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation PWM & PPM
7. Verification of Time division multiplexing and demultiplexing.
8. Pulse code modulation and demodulation
9. Delta modulation and demodulation
10. Amplitude shift keying
11. Frequency shift keying
12. Phase shift keying
EQUIPMENTS &SOFTWARE REQUIRED SOFTWARE
i) Computer Systems with latest specifications
ii) Connected in LAN (Optional)
iii) Operating system (Windows 7)
iv) Simulations software (Simulink & MATLAB)
EQUIPMENT
1. RPS - 0 – 30 V
– 20 M
2. CRO - 0 Hz.
3. Function
Generators - 0 – 1 M Hz
4. Components
5. Multimeters
6. Spectrum Analyzer
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Soft skills and Interpersonal Communication
Course
Humanities Course Code
Category
Skill Oriented
Course Type L-T-P-C 1–0–2–2
Course
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 15
Life skills for better
External Assessment (Viva-Voce) 35
life
Total Marks 50

COURSE OUTCOMES

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

CO1 Understand the significance of soft skills and its importance towards his goal setting.
Develop interpersonal relations through effective communication and public speaking.
CO2
Build confidence exercising verbal and non-verbal techniques with analytical skills for
CO3 his success.

Utilize various skills required to become a good leader and thorough professional.
CO4
Improve decision-making skills and problem-solving skills with emotional intelligence.
CO5

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 - - - - - - - 1 2 - - - - -
CO2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - -
CO3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - -
CO4 - - - - - - - - 2 - 1 - - -
CO5 - - - - - - 2 - - - - - - -
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Syllabus
1. Soft Skills: An Introduction – Definition and Significance of Soft Skills;
Process, Importance and Measurement of Soft Skill Development.
2. Self-Discovery:Discovering the Self; Setting Goals; Beliefs, Values,
UNIT - I Attitude, Virtue.
3. Positivity and Motivation: Developing Positive Thinkingand Attitude;
Driving out Negativity; Meaning andTheories of Motivation; Enhancing
Motivation Levels.
1. Interpersonal Communication: Interpersonal relations; communication
models,process and barriers; team communication; developing
interpersonal relationshipsthrough effective communication; listening
skills; essential formal writing skills; corporate communication styles –
UNIT-II
assertion, persuasion, negotiation.
2. Public Speaking:Skills, Methods, Strategies and Essential tips for
effective public speaking.
3. Non-Verbal Communication: Importance and Elements; Body Language.
1. Presentation Skills: Types, Content, Audience Analysis, Essential Tips –
Before, During and After, OvercomingNervousness.
2. Group Discussion: Importance, Planning, Elements, Skills assessed;
effectivelydisagreeing, Initiating, Summarizingand Attaining the Objective.
UNIT-III
3. Interview Skills: Interviewer and Interviewee – in-depth perspectives.
Before, During and After the Interview. Tips for Success.
4. Teamwork and Leadership Skills: Concept of Teams;Building effective
teams; Concept of Leadership and honing Leadership skills
1. Etiquette and Manners – Social and Business.
2. Time Management – Concept, Essentials, Tips.
3. Personality Development – Meaning, Nature, Features, Stages, Models;
UNIT - IV Learning Skills; Adaptability Skills.
4. Leadership and Assertiveness Skills: A Good Leader; Leaders and
Managers; Leadership Theories; Types ofLeaders; Leadership
Behaviour; Assertiveness Skills.
1. Emotional Intelligence: Meaning, History, Features, Components,
Intrapersonal and Management Excellence; Strategies to enhance
Emotional Intelligence
2. Conflict Management: Conflict - Definition, Nature, Types and
Causes; Methods
UNIT- V 3. Decision-Making and Problem-Solving Skills: Meaning, Types and
Models, Group and Ethical Decision-Making, Problems and
Dilemmas in application of these skills.
4. Stress Management: Stress - Definition, Nature, Types, Symptoms
and Causes; Stress Analysis Models andImpact of Stress;
Measurement and Management of Stress.

Text books :
Managing Soft Skills for Personality Development –
1.
edited by B.N.Ghosh, McGraw Hill India, 2012.
2. English and Soft Skills – S.P.Dhanavel, Orient BlackswanIndia, 2010

WEB RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/109107121/
2. https://www.goskills.com/Soft-Skills
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MICROPROCESSORS and MICROCONTROLLERS
ECE
III B. Tech II Semester

Course Professional 20EC6T21

Course Code
Category Core
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment Semester End 30
Prerequisites STLD, CAO Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will

1 Study architecture and memory organization of 8086.
2 Learn Programming concepts of 8086.
3 Study the interfacing of 8086 with Peripheral devices (I/O devices).
4 Learn the programming concepts of 8051microcontroller.
5 Study architecture and features of ARM Processor and its Applications.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Demonstrate the concepts of architecture and key features of 8086 K2
CO2 Develop Assembly Language Programs using 8086. K3
Understand Interfacing for I/O devices like Stepper motor, LED
CO3 K3
displays with 8086.
Understand Interface I/O devices like Keyboard, display units with K3
CO4
8051.
Illustrate the concepts of ARM Processor in embedded real time
CO5 K2
project applications.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 1 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Introduction: Basic Microprocessor architecture, Harvard and Von Neumann
architectures with examples, Microprocessor Unit versus Microcontroller Unit, CISC
and RISC architectures, 8085 architecture.
UNIT I 8086 ARCHITECTURE: Main features, pin diagram/description, 8086
microprocessor family, internal architecture, bus interfacing unit, execution unit,
interruptsandinterruptresponses,8086 system timing, minimum mode and maximum
mode configurations.
8086 PROGRAMMING: Instruction formats, Addressing modes, Instruction Set,
UNIT II Assembler Directives, Macros, writing simple programs with an assembler, assembly
language program development tools.
8086 INTERFACING: Semiconductor memories interfacing (RAM, ROM), Intel
8255 programmable peripheral interface, alphanumeric displays (LED,7-segment
UNIT III
display, multiplexed 7-segment display), Intel 8257 DMA controller, Intel 8259
programmable interrupt controller, software and hardware interrupt applications,
Programmable communication interface 8251-USART, stepper motor, A/D and D/A
converters
Intel 8051 MICROCONTROLLER: Architecture, pin descriptions, input/output
ports and circuits, memory organization, counters/timers, serial data input/output,
UNIT IV
interrupts. Assembly language programming: Instructions, addressing modes, simple
programs. Interfacing to 8051: A/D and D/A Convertors, Stepper motor interface,
keyboard, LCD Interfacing, Traffic light control.
ARM Architectures and Processors: ARM Architecture, ARM Processors Families,
ARM Cortex-M Series Family, ARM Cortex-M3 Processor Functional Description,
functions and interfaces.
UNIT V Programmers Model – Modes of operation and execution, Instruction set summary,
System address map, write buffer, bit-banding, processor core register summary,
exceptions. ARM Cortext-M3 programming – Software delay, Programming
techniques, Loops, Stack and Stack pointer, subroutines and parameter passing,
parallel I/O, Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller – functional description and NVIC
programmers‘ model.

TEXT BOOKS
Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals, A.K Ray, K.M.Bhurchandhi, Tata McGraw Hill
1. Publications, 2000.
The 8051 Microcontrollers and Embedded systems Using Assembly and C, Muhammad Ali
2 Mazidi and Janice Gillespie Mazidi and Rollin D. McKinlay; Pearson 2-Edition, 2011.
3 The Definitive Guide to ARM Cortex-M3 and Cortex-M4 Processors by JosephYou.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Embedded Systems Fundamentals with Arm Cortex-M based Microcontrollers: A Practical
1. Approach in English, by Dr. Alexander G. Dean, Published by Arm Education Media, 2017
2. Microprocessors and Interfacing – Programming and Hardware by Douglas V Hall, SSSP
Rao, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 3rd Edition, 1994.
3. Cortex -M3 Technical Reference Manual.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VLSI Design
ECE
III B. Tech II Semester

Course Professional Core Course Code 20EC6T22

Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Digital IC Application and Internal Assessment 30
Digital System design Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100
COURSE OBJECTIVES: This course will help to
enable the student to visualize MOS fabrication technologies and to understand electrical
1
Properties of MOS, CMOS and Bi CMOS circuits.
train the student to draw integrated circuit layouts and stick diagrams following Lambda
2
based design rules and to understand basic circuit concepts.
3 know the basic building blocks of Analog IC design
4 study various Combinational and sequential Logic circuit design
5 study the role of FPGA in VLSI design and usage of advanced technologies

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Demonstrate a clear understanding of CMOS fabrication flow and K2
CO1 impact of electrical properties of MOS circuits in semiconductor
industry
Know three sets of design rules with which NMOS and CMOS design K3
CO2 may be fabricated by understanding concepts of circuits and scaling of
MOS devices
CO3 Design the basic building blocks of Analog IC K3
Discuss about the integrated circuit characterization and performance K3
CO4
Estimation.
Understand the importance of FPGA and effect of advanced K2
CO5
technology towards performance of VLSI design

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 1 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO3 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO4 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-I:INTRODUCTION AND BASIC ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF
MOS CIRCUITS:VLSI Design Flow, Introduction to IC technology, Fabrication
process: nMOS, pMOS and CMOS. Ids versus Vds Relationships, Aspects of MOS
transistor Threshold Voltage, MOS transistor Trans, Output Conductance and Figure
of Merit. nMOS Inverter, Pull-up to Pulldown Ratio for nMOS inverter driven by
UNIT I another nMOS inverter, and through one or more pass transistors. Alternative forms of
pull-up, The CMOS Inverter, Latch-up in CMOS circuits, Bi-CMOS Inverter,
Comparison between CMOS and BiCMOS technology, MOS Layers, Stick Diagrams,
Design Rules and Layout, Layout Diagrams for MOS circuits
BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS: Sheet Resistance, Sheet Resistance concept applied
to MOS transistors and Inverters, Area Capacitance of Layers, Standard unit of
capacitance, some area Capacitance Calculations, The Delay Unit, Inverter Delays,
driving large capacitive loads, Propagation Delays, Wiring Capacitances, Choice of
UNIT II
layers. SCALING OF MOS CIRCUITS: Scaling models and scaling factors, Scaling
factors for device parameters, Limitations of scaling, Limits due to sub threshold
currents, Limits on logic levels and supply voltage due to noise and current density.
Switch logic, Gate logic.
BASIC BUILDING BLOCKS OF ANALOG IC DESIGN: Regions of operation of
MOSFET, Modelling of transistor, body bias effect, biasing styles, single stage
UNIT III amplifier with resistive load, single stage amplifier with diode connected load,
Common Source amplifier, Common Drain amplifier, Common Gate amplifier,
current sources and sinks.
CMOS COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN:
Static CMOS Design: Complementary CMOS, Rationed Logic, Pass-Transistor
Logic.Dynamic CMOS Design: Dynamic Logic-Basic Principles, Speed and Power
Dissipation of Dynamic Logic, Issues in Dynamic Design, Cascading Dynamic Gates,
Choosing a Logic Style, Gate Design in the Ultra Deep-Submicron Era, Latch Versus
UNIT IV
Register, Latch based design, timing decimation, positive feedback, in stability, Meta
stability, multiplexer based latches, Master-Slave Based Edge Triggered Register,
clock to q delay, setup time, hold time, reduced clock load master slave registers,
Clocked CMOS register. Cross coupled NAND and NOR, SR Master Slave register,
Storage mechanism, pipelining.
FPGA DESIGN: FPGA design flow, Basic FPGA architecture, FPGA Technologies,
Introduction to FPGA Families.
UNIT V INTRODUCTIONTOADVANCEDTECHNOLOGIES: Giga-scale dilemma, Short
channel effects, High–k, Metal Gate Technology, Fin-FET, TFET.

TEXT BOOKS
Essentials of VLSI Circuits and Systems – Kamran Eshraghian, Douglas and A.Pucknell and
1.
Sholeh Eshraghian, Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited, 2005 Edition.
2 Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits by Behzad Razavi, McGraw Hill, 2003
Digital Integrated Circuits, Jan M.Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan and Borivoje Nikolic, 2
3
edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. ―Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems‖, John P.Uyemura, John Wiley&Sons, reprint
2009.
2. Integrated Nano electronics: Nano scale CMOS, Post-CMOS and Allied Nano technologies
Vinod Kumar Khanna, Springer India, 1st edition, 2016
3. Fin-FETs and other multi-gate transistors, Colinge JP, Editor NewYork, Springer, 2008
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Digital Signal Processing
ECE
III B. Tech, II Semester
Course Category PC Course Code 20EC6T23
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Signals & Systems Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES:By studying this course the student will learn

1. The importance of discrete-time LTI system and its frequency analysis.

2. Applications of DFT in filtering and its efficient computation.
3. Design of IIR filter and its implementation.
4. Design of FIR filter and its implementation.
5. Introduction to Multirate and Adaptive signal Processing

COURSE OUTCOMES

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive Level

Understand the characteristics of the discrete-time LTI system and

CO1 K4
the frequency analysis with applications in different filters
CO2 Find the Fourier transform of a discrete-time signal using FFT. K3

CO3 Different methods to realize the IIR filters with the design. K3

CO4 Different methods to realize the FIR filters with the design. K3
The basic concept of multirate signal processing and adaptive signal
CO5 K2
processing
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Review of basic DSP concept. Discrete-time LTI system. Linear Time-Invariant
Systems Characterized by Constant-Coefficient Difference EquationsOne-sided z-
transform and its properties. Solution to Difference Equations using one-sided z-
UNIT I transform.
Frequency-Domain Analysis of LTI Systems-Frequency response of LTI systems.
Computation of the Frequency Response Function, Ideal Filter Characteristics, low
pass, High pass, and Bandpass Filters
The Discrete Fourier Transform: Its Properties and Applications- DFT, DFT
as a linear transformation, Relationship of DFT to the z-transform, Properties of
UNIT II DFT, Use of DFT in linear filtering, Overlap-Add and Overlap-save method, Fast
Fourier transforms (FFT) - Radix-2 decimation in time and decimation in frequency
FFT Algorithms, Inverse FFT.
REALIZATIONS & DESIGN OF IIR DIGITAL FILTERS: Basic structures of
IIR systems, Direct form I and II, Transposed forms. Analog filter approximations –
UNIT III
Butter worth and Chebyshev, Design of IIR Digital filters from analog filters,
Design Examples,
REALIZATIONS & DESIGN OF FIR DIGITAL FILTERS:
Basic structures of FIR systems, Lattice structures, Lattice-ladder structures,
UNIT IV Characteristics of FIR Digital Filters, frequency response. Design of FIR Digital
Filters using Window Techniques and Frequency Sampling technique, Comparison
of IIR & FIR filters,
Multirate Signal Processing- Interpolation, Decimation, Sampling rate
UNIT V conversion, Digital Filter Banks
Adaptive Signal Processing-Adaptive Systems, Adaptive Linear Combiner

TEXT BOOKS
Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms, and Applications: John G. Proakis,
1.
Dimitris G.Manolakis, Pearson Education / PHI, 2007.
2. Multirate Systems and Filter Banks: P.P Vaidyanathan, PHI
3. Adaptive Signal Processing: Bernard Widrow and Peter N.Stearns, PHI
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Discrete Time Signal Processing – A.V.Oppenheim and R.W. Schaffer, PHI
2. Adaptive Filter Theory- Simon S. Hykin
st
3. Digital Signal Processing—Tarunkumar Rawat, 1 edition, Oxford, 2015.
WEB RESOURCES
1. www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/digital signal processing.html
2. https://online.stanford.edu/courses/ee264-digital-signal-processing
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
III B. Tech II Semester
Course 20EC6T2
Professional Core Course Code
Category 7
Course
Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Type
Prerequisi Electromagnetic Waves and Internal Assessment 30
tes Transmission Lines, Antenna Wave Semester End Examination 70
and Propagation. Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 Electromagnetic wave propagation in rectangular wave guide
Different microwave junctions and components Scattering matrix of different 2-port, 3-port
2
junctions
3 Classifications of microwave tubes and working principles of klystron tube
4 Classifications of microwave tubes and working principles of solid state devices.
5 Measurement of microwave parameters and fundamentals of HFSS

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Determine dominant modes and cut off frequencies of rectangular K2
CO1
wave guides
Analyze different microwave junctions and components Determine the K3
CO2 S-matrix for microwave junctions like E-plane, H-plane and Magic
Tee
CO3 Compute power and efficiency of klystron tubes K2

Analyze the different Microwave Solid State Devices like Gunn diode, K2
CO4
IMPATT and TRAPATT
Measure microwave parameters like phase, attenuation, impedance, K2
CO5
Frequency,VSWR.and learn Basics of HFSS

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO5 2 1 1 2 - - - - - - - - 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
MICROWAVE TRANSMISSION LINES: Introduction, Microwave Spectrum
and Bands, Applications of Microwaves.
Rectangular Waveguides– TE/TM mode analysis, Expressions for Fields,
Characteristic Equation and Cut-off Frequencies, Dominant and Degenerate
UNIT I
Modes, Sketches of TE and TM mode fields in the cross-section, Mode
Characteristics – Phase and Group Velocities, Wavelengths and Impedance
Relations, Related problems: Impossibility of TEM mode, Cavity Resonators-
Introduction, classification, Rectangular Cavity Resonators.
WAVEGUIDE COMPONENTS AND APPLICATIONS: Coupling
Mechanisms –
Probe, Loop, Aperture types. Waveguide Discontinuities –Waveguide irises,
Tuning Screws and Posts, Matched Loads. Waveguide Attenuators – Resistive
Card, Rotary Vane types; Waveguide Phase Shifters– Dielectric, Rotary Vane
UNIT II types.
POWER DIVIDERS: S-matrix analysis of E-Plane Tee, H-Plane Tee, Magic Tee,
Multihole directional coupler. Ferrite Components– Faraday Rotation, S-Matrix
Calculations for Isolator, Circulator, Related Problems.
Introduction to Microstrip lines. Wilkinson power divider and branch line coupler
(equal & unequal)
MICROWAVE TUBES: Limitations and Losses of conventional tubes at
microwave frequencies, Microwave tubes – O type and M type classifications.
O-type tubes: Two Cavity Klystrons – Velocity Modulation Process and
UNIT III Applegate Diagram, Bunching Process and Small Signal Theory –Expressions for
output Power and Efficiency, Reflex Klystrons –Applegate Diagram and Principle
of working, Mathematical Theory of Bunching, Power Output, Efficiency, Related
Problems. Introduction to M-type Tubes.
MICROWAVE SOLID STATE DEVICES:
Introduction, Classification, Applications. TEDs – Gunn Diode – Principle, RWH
UNIT IV
Theory, Characteristics. Avalanche Transit Time Devices – Introduction, IMPATT
and TRAPATT Diodes – Principle of Operation and Characteristics.
MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS: Description of Microwave Bench –
Different Blocks and their Features, Precautions, Microwave Power Measurement
– Calorimetric Method, Bolometer Method. Measurement of Attenuation,
UNIT V Frequency, VSWR, Cavity Q, Impedance Measurements.
Computational Mechanism tools and its overview, Perfectly Matched Layer
(PML), Finite Conductivity Layered Impedance, Impedance Symmetry,
Lumped RLC Master/Slave, Screening Impedance.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Microwave Devices and Circuits - Samuel Y.Liao, PHI,2009.
Microwave Circuits and Passive Devices – M.L. Sisodia and G.S.Raghuvanshi, Wiley
2.
Eastern Ltd., New Age International Publishers Ltd., 1995
3. Microwave and Radar Engineering by GottapuSasibhusan Rao, Pearson Publications
REFERENCE BOOKS
Foundations for Microwave Engineering – R.E. Collin, IEEE Press, John Wiley, 2nd
1.
Edition, 2002.
2. Microwave and Radar Engineering-Dr.M. Kulkarni,2nd edition, umesh publications,2008.
3. Microwave Engineering by Annapurna Das and Sisir Das by Mc Graw Hill
4. Microwave Engineering by David M Pozar Fourth Edition, Wiley Publications
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOBILE & CELLULAR COMMUNICATION
ECE
III B. Tech, II Semester
Course Category PE Course Code 20EC6T28
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Antennas and
Semester End Examination 70
Propagation
Total Marks 100
COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 Cellular communication fundamentals and small cell structure

2 Various types of interferences
3 frequency management techniques and concept of signal reflectors and cell coverage
4 The concept of handoff techniques
5 The Architecture of GSM and OFDM.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand Cellular fundamentals and small cell structure K2

CO2 Analyze the frequency management K2

Analyze the channel assignments to reduce interference and Identify suitable
CO3 K2
antennas for cell sites
CO4 Apply the concept of handoff to reduce dropped call rates K2
Understand the architectures of GSM and OFDM used in network
CO5 technologies like 3G, 4G etc. K2

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO5 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
CELLULAR MOBILE RADIO SYSTEMS: Introduction to Cellular Mobile
System, uniqueness of mobile radio environment, operation of cellular systems,
consideration of the components of Cellular system, Hexagonal shaped cells,
UNIT I Analog and Digital Cellular systems. CELLULAR CONCEPTS: Evolution of
Cellular systems, Concept of frequency reuse. Cellular traffic: trunking and
blocking, Grade of Service; Cellular structures: macro, micro, pico and femto
cells; Cell splitting, Cell sectoring
INTERFERENCE: Types of interferences, Introduction to Co-Channel
Interference, real time Co-Channel interference, Co-Channel measurement, Co-
UNIT II channel Interference Reduction Factor, desired C/I from a normal case in a omni-
directional Antenna system, design of Antenna system, antenna parameters and
their effects, diversity receiver, non-co-channel interference-different types.
FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT AND CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT:
Numbering and grouping, setup access and paging channels, channel assignments
to cell sites and mobile units: fixed channel and non-fixed channel assignment,
channel sharing and borrowing. CELL COVERAGE FOR SIGNAL AND
UNIT III TRAFFIC: Signal reflections in flat and hilly terrain, effect of human made
structures, phase difference between direct and reflected paths, straight line path
loss slope, general formula for mobile propagation over water and flat open area,
near and long distance propagation, antenna height gain, form of a point to point
model.
HANDOFF STRATEGIES: Concept of Handoff, types of handoff, handoff
initiation, delaying handoff, forced handoff, mobile assigned handoff, intersystem
UNIT IV
handoff, soft and hard hand offs, vehicle locating methods, dropped call rates and
their evaluation.
DIGITAL CELLULAR NETWORKS: GSM architecture, GSM channels,
UNIT V multiple access schemes; TDMA, CDMA, OFDMA.3G and 4G Wireless
Standards GSM, GPRS, WCDMA , LTE , Wi-MAX, Introduction to 5G standards.

TEXT BOOKS
Wireless And Cellular Telecommunications- William C. Y. Lee- McGraw
1.
Hill, 3rdEdition, 2006
Principles of Mobile Communications – Gordon L. Stuber, Springer International 2 nd
2.
Edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS
nd
1. Wireless Communications – Theodore. S. Rapport, Pearson education, 2 Edition,2002.
Advanced Wireless Communications-4G By. Savo G Glisic, John Wiley & Sons
2.
Publication 2nd Edition
Small Cell Networks: Deployment, PHY Techniques, and Resource Management, Tony Q.
3. S.Quek, G.D.L Roche, Ismail Guvenc, MariosKountouris- Cambridge University Press,
2013
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMOS ANALOG IC DESIGN
ECE
III B.Tech, II Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC6T29
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
VLSI Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 the basic parameters of MOS transistor and different models

2 the basic theory of MOS transistors and Different characteristics

3 Different applications of CMOS transistor

4 the Op-Amps and its application using CMOS transistor

5 the basics theory of open loop comparators.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the basic parameters of MOS transistor and different models K3
Understand the basic theory of MOS transistors and Different
CO2 K2
characteristics‘
CO3 Study the Different applications of C-MOS transistor K3

CO4 Design the Op-Amps and its application using C-MOS transistor K3

CO5 Learn the basics theory of open loop comparators. K3

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
MOS Devices and Modeling The MOS Transistor, Passive Components-Capacitor
& Resistor, Integrated circuit Layout, CMOS Device Modeling - Simple MOS
UNIT I
Large-Signal Model, Other Model Parameters, Small-Signal Model for the MOS
Transistor, Computer Simulation Models, Sub-threshold MOS Model.
Analog CMOS Sub-Circuits MOS Switch, MOS Diode, MOS Active Resistor,
Current Sinks and Sources, Current Mirrors-Current mirror with Beta Helper,
UNIT II
Degeneration, Cascode current Mirror and Wilson Current Mirror, Current and
Voltage References, Band gap Reference.
CMOS Amplifiers Inverters, Single Stage Amplifiers –Basic Concepts, Differential

UNIT III Amplifiers, Cascode Amplifiers, Current Amplifiers, Output Amplifiers, High Gain
Amplifiers Architectures.
CMOS Operational Amplifiers Design of CMOS Op Amps, Compensation of Op
Amps, design of one stage op-Amps, , Power-Supply Rejection Ratio of one-Stage

UNIT IV Op Amps ,Design of Two- Stage Op Amps, Power-Supply Rejection Ratio of Two-
Stage Op Amps, Cascode Op Amps, Noise in Op Amps. Stability and Frequency
Compensation, Measurement Techniques of OPAMP.
Comparators Characterization of Comparator, Two-Stage, Open-Loop

UNIT V Comparators, Other Open-Loop Comparators, Improving the Performance of Open-

Loop Comparators, Discrete- Time Comparators.

TEXT BOOKS
CMOS Analog Circuit Design - Philip E. Allen and Douglas R. Holberg, Oxford
1.
University Press, International Second Edition/Indian Edition, 2010
Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits- Paul R. Gray, PaulJ. Hurst, S. Lewis
2.
and R. G. Meyer, Wiley India, Fifth Edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Analog Integrated Circuit Design- David A.Johns, Ken Martin, Wiley Student Edition,
1.
2013.
2. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits- BehzadRazavi, TMH Edition.
3. CMOS: Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation- Baker, Li and Boyce, PHI
WEB RESOURCES
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/102/117102062/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disaster Management
(Open elective)
III B.Tech, II Semester
Course Category Open elective Course Code 20CE6T35
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 To provide basic conceptual understanding of disasters.

2 To understand approaches of Disaster Management.

3 To build skills to respond to disaster.

4 To understand to reduce the intensity of future disasters.

5 To understand the Restoration of human life in the region.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Knowledge on characteristics of natural disasters K3

CO2 Planning on approaches of Disaster Management K2

CO3 Ability to plan and design the new skills in disaster response K3

CO4 Role of remote sensing system in disaster area response K3

CO5 Knowledge on the Restoration of human life in the region K3

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO2 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO3 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO5 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Natural Hazards and Disaster Management: Introduction of DM – Inter disciplinary
nature of the subject– Disaster Management cycle – Five priorities for action. Case
UNIT I study methods of the following: Vegetal Cover floods, droughts – Earthquakes –
landslides – global warming, cyclones & Tsunamis – Post Tsunami hazards along
the Indian coast
Man Made Disaster and Their Management Along With Case Study Methods Of
The Following: Fire hazards – transport hazard dynamics – solid waste
UNIT II management – post disaster – bio terrorism -threat in mega cities, rail and aircraft
accidents, ground water, industries - Emerging infectious diseases and Aids and
their management
Risk and Vulnerability: Building codes and land use planning – Social
Vulnerability – Environmental vulnerability – Macro-economic management and
UNIT III
sustainable development, Climate change risk rendition – Financial management of
disaster – related losses
Role of Technology in Disaster Managements: Disaster management for infra
structures, taxonomy of infra structure – treatment plants and process facilities-
electrical substations- roads and bridges mitigation programme for earth quakes –
UNIT IV
flowchart, geospatial information in agriculture drought assessment - Multimedia
Technology in disaster risk management and training - Transformable Indigenous
Knowledge in disaster reduction – Role of RS & GIS
Multi-sectional Issues, Education and Community Preparedness: Impact of disaster
on poverty and deprivation - Climate change adaptation and human health -
Exposure, health hazards and environmental risk-Forest management and disaster
risk reduction -The Red cross and red crescent movement - Corporate sector and
UNIT V
disaster risk reduction- Education in disaster risk reduction Essentials of school
disaster education - Community capacity and disaster resilience-Community based
disaster recovery - Community based disaster management and social capital-
Designing resilience- building community capacity for action

TEXT BOOKS
1. ―Disaster Management guide lines‖, GOI-UND Disaster Risk program (2009-2012)
2. Modh S. (2010) ―Managing Natural Disasters‖, Mac Millan publishers India LTD.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Murty D.B.N. (2012) ―Disaster Management‖, Deep and Deep Publication PVT.Ltd. New Delhi
WEB RESOURCES
https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec19_hs20/preview
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fundamentals of Electric Vehicles
(Open Elective – II offered to other departments)
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EE6T19
Courses
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites NIL Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To familiarize the students with the need and advantages of electric and hybrid electric
1
vehicles.
2 To understand various power converters used in electric vehicles.
3 To know various architecture of hybrid electric vehicles.
4 To be familiar all the different types of motors suitable for electric vehicles.
5 To have knowledge on latest developments in strategies and other storage systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive Level
CO1 Illustrate different types of electric vehicles.. K3
CO2 Select suitable power converters for EV applications. K2
CO3 Design HEV configuration for a specific application. K4
CO4 Choose an effective method for EV and HEV applications. K3
CO5 Analyze a battery management system for EV and HEV K4
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 - - - - 2 2 - - - - 2 1 1
CO2 2 3 - - - 1 1 - - - - - 2 2
CO3 - 3 - - - 1 - - - - 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 - - - 2 1 - - - 2 - 1 2
CO5 2 - - - - 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction
Fundamentals of vehicles - Components of conventional vehicles - drawbacks of
UNIT 1
conventional vehicles – Need for electric vehicles - History of Electric Vehicles –
Types of Electric Vehicles – Advantages and applications of Electric Vehicles.
Components of Electric Vehicles
Main components of Electric Vehicles – Power Converters - Controller and Electric
UNIT 2
Traction Motor – Rectifiers used in EVs – Bidirectional DC–DC Converters –
Voltage Source Inverters – PWM inverters used in EVs.
Hybrid Electric Vehicles
Evolution of Hybrid Electric Vehicles – Advantages and Applications of Hybrid
UNIT 3
Electric Vehicles – Architecture of HEVs - Series and Parallel HEVs – Complex
HEVs – Range extended HEVs – Examples - Merits and Demerits.
Motors for Electric Vehicles
Characteristics of traction drive - requirements of electric machines for EVs –
UNIT 4 Different motors suitable for Electric and Hybrid Vehicles – Induction Motors –
Synchronous Motors – Permanent Magnetic Synchronous Motors – Brushless DC
Motors – Switched Reluctance Motors (Construction details and working only)
UNIT 5 Energy Sources for Electric Vehicles
Batteries - Types of Batteries – Lithium-ion - Nickel-metal hydride - Lead-acid –
Comparison of Batteries - Battery Management System – Ultra capacitors –
Flywheels – Fuel Cell – it‘s working.

TEXT BOOKS
1 Iqbal Hussein - Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals - CRC Press -
2021.
2 Denton - Tom. Electric and hybrid vehicles. Rutledge - 2020.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Kumar - L. Ashok - and S. Albert Alexander. Power Converters for Electric Vehicles.
CRC Press - 2020.
2 Chau - Kwok Tong. Electric vehicle machines and drives: design - Analysis and
Application. John Wiley & Sons - 2015.
3 Berg - Helena. Batteries for electric vehicles: materials and electrochemistry.
Cambridge university press - 2015
WEB RESOURCES (Suggested)
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106170
2 https://inverted.in/blog/fundamentals-of-electric-vehicles
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Introduction to Automobile Engineering
III B.Tech II Semester
(Open elective)
Course Category Open elective Course Code 20ME6T19
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 To learn functions of different components in Automobiles
2 To impart knowledge on Transmission systems and Steering Systems.
3 To impart the knowledge on ignition system & suspension systems.
4 To impart the knowledge of Braking system and Engine specification.
5 To understand the concept of safety and Engine emission control systems

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the function of various components of automobile. K2
Identify the merits and demerits of the various transmission and steering
CO2 K2
systems.
CO3 Describe the concept of Ignition and Suspension systems. K2

CO4 Explain the features of Braking system and Engine specification. K3

CO5 Analyze the Engine emission control standards. K3

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 - - - - 2 2 - - - - - 2 -
CO2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - - 2 1
CO5 2 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 1 3 -
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
INTRODUCTION: Components of four-wheeler automobile-chassis and body-
UNIT I power unit-types of automobile engines, engine construction, oil filters, oil pumps,
air filters, Fuel pump, nozzle, Types of carburetors
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM: Clutches, principle, types, cone clutch, single plate
clutch, multi plate clutch, magnetic and centrifugal clutches, Propeller shaft-Hotch-
Kiss drive, Torque tube drive, universal joint, differential rear axles-types-wheels
UNIT II
and tires.
STEERING SYSTEM: Steering geometry-camber, castor, king pin rake, combined
angle toe-in, center point steering. steering gears – types, steering linkages.
IGNITION SYSTEM: Function of an ignition system, auto transformer, electronic
ignition using contact triggers-spark advance and retard mechanism.
UNIT III SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Objects of suspension systems-rigid axle suspension
system, torsion bar, shock absorber, independent suspension system
BRAKING SYSTEM: Mechanical brake system, hydraulic brake system, master
cylinder, pneumatic and vacuum brakes.
UNIT IV ENGINE SPECIFICATION: Introduction-engine specifications with regard to
power, speed, torque, no. of cylinders and arrangement
SAFETY SYSTEMS: Introduction, safety systems - seat belt, air bags, bumper,
wind shield, suspension sensors, traction control, mirrors.
UNIT V ENGINE EMISSION CONTROL: Introduction-types of pollutants, mechanism of
formation, concentration measurement, methods of controlling-engine
modification.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Automotive Mechanics / Heitner.
2. Automobile Engineering / William Crouse, TMH Distributors.
3. Automobile Engineering- P.S Gill, S.K. Kataria& Sons, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Automotive Engines Theory and Servicing, James D. Halderman and Chase D. Mitchell
Jr., Pearson education inc.
2. Automotive Engineering / Newton Steeds & Garrett.
3. Automotive Mechanics – Vol. 1 & Vol. 2 / Kripal Singh, standard publishers.
WEB RESOURCES
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106080/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Computer Forensics
CSE, IT, CE, ME, EEE, ECE
III B.Tech II Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20CS7T15
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

1 Identify Security Risks And Take Preventive Steps

2 Understand the Forensics Fundamentals

3 Understand the Evidence Capturing Process

COURSE OUTCOMES BTL

Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

CO1 Understand the Cybercrime Fundamentals K2

CO2 List the types of attacks on networks K4

CO3 Analyze various tools available for Cybercrime Investigation K4

CO4 Summarize the Computer Forensics and Investigation Fundamentals and tools K2

CO5 Analyze the legal perspectives of Cybercrime K4

Note: K1- Remembering, K2-Understanding, K3-Applying, K4-Analyzing, K5-Evaluating,
K6-Creating
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Cybercrime: Introduction, Cybercrime: Definition and Origins
of the Word, Cybercrime and Information Security, Cybercriminals,
Classifications of Cybercrime, Cyberstalking, Cybercafe and Cybercrimes,
UNIT I
Botnets. Attack Vector, Proliferation of Mobile and Wireless Devices, Security
Challenges Posed by Mobile Devices, Attacks on Mobile/Cell Phones, Network
and Computer Attacks.
Tools and Methods : Proxy Servers and Anonymizers, Phishing, Password
Cracking, Keyloggers and Spywares, Virus and Worms, Trojan Horses and
Backdoors, Steganography, Sniffers, Spoofing, Session Hijacking Buffer over
UNIT II
flow, DoS and DDoS Attacks, SQL Injection, Buffer Overflow, Attacks on
Wireless Networks, Identity Theft (ID Theft), Foot Printing and Social
Engineering, Port Scanning, Enumeration.
Cyber Crime Investigation: Introduction, Investigation Tools, eDiscovery,
Digital Evidence Collection, Evidence Preservation, E-Mail Investigation, E-Mail
UNIT III Tracking, IP Tracking, E-Mail Recovery, Hands on Case Studies. Encryption and
Decryption Methods, Search and Seizure of Computers, Recovering Deleted
Evidences, Password Cracking.
Computer Forensics and Investigations: Understanding Computer Forensics,
Preparing for Computer Investigations. Current Computer Forensics Tools:
Evaluating Computer Forensics Tools, Computer Forensics Software Tools,
UNIT IV Computer Forensics Hardware Tools, Validating and Testing Forensics Software,
Face, Iris and Fingerprint Recognition, Audio Video Analysis, Windows System
Forensics, Linux System Forensics, Graphics and Network Forensics, E-mail
Investigations, Cell Phone and Mobile Device Forensics.
Cyber Crime Legal Perspectives: Introduction, Cybercrime and the Legal
Landscape around the World, The Indian IT Act-ITA2000, Challenges to Indian
Law and Cybercrime Scenario in India, Consequences of Not Addressing the
UNIT V
Weakness in Information Technology Act, Digital Signatures and the Indian IT
Act, Amendments to the Indian IT Act, Cybercrime and Punishment, Cyberlaw,
Technology and Students: Indian Scenario.

TEXT BOOKS
Sunit Belapure Nina Godbole ―Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber Crimes,
1.
Computer Forensics and Legal Perspectives‖, WILEY,First Edition 2011.
Nelson Phillips and Enfinger Steuart, ―Computer Forensics and Investigations‖,
2.
Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Michael T. Simpson, Kent Backman and James E. Corley, ―Hands on Ethical Hacking
1.
and Network Defence‖, Cengage, 2019.
Computer Forensics, Computer Crime Investigation by John R. Vacca, Firewall Media,
2.
New Delhi,First Edition,2015
Alfred Basta, Nadine Basta,Mary Brown and Ravinder Kumar ―Cyber Security and
3.
Cyber Laws‖ , Cengage,First Edition,2018.
WEB RESOURCES
1. CERT-In Guidelines- http://www.cert-in.org.in/
https://www.coursera.org/learn/introduction-cybersecurity-cyber-attacks [ Online
2.
Course]
3. https://computersecurity.stanford.edu/free-online-videos [ Free Online Videos]
Nickolai Zeldovich. 6.858 Computer Systems Security. Fall 2014. Massachusetts
4. Institute of Technology: MIT OpenCourseWare, https://ocw.mit.edu License: Creative
Commons BY-NC-SA.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY

(ECE)
III B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Professional core Course Code 20EC6L08
Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 15
Digital Electronics Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 Assembly language program using MASM and Interfacing
2 Assembly level language program using 8051 and Interfacing
assembly level language program using ARM CORTEX M3 Processor using KEIL
3
MDK ARM

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Develop assembly level language program using MASM and Interfacing K3
CO2 Develop assembly level language program using 8051 and Interfacing K3
Develop assembly level language program using ARM CORTEX M3
CO3 K3
Processor using KEIL MDK ARM
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
CO2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2
CO3 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
List of Experiments
PART- A: 8086 Assembly Language Programming and Interfacing
(Minimum Five Experiments Should be Conducted)
Programs for 16 -bit arithmetic operations (using Various Addressing Modes).
1 a. Addition of n-BCD numbers.
b. Multiplication and Division operations
2 Program for sorting an array.
3 Program for Factorial of given n-numbers.
4 PPI-Intel8255 Interface using 8086
5 Interfacing ADC to 8086
6 Interfacing DAC to 8086
PART- B: 8051 Assembly Language Programming and Interfacing
(Minimum Five Experiments Should be Conducted)
1 Finding number of 1‘s and number of 0‘s in a given 8-bit number
2 Average of n-numbers
3 Ascending/ Descending order
4 Setting and Masking bits in an 8-bit Number
5 Interfacing LCD to8051.
6 Stepper Motor Interfacing Using 8051
PART- C:Conduct the following experiments using ARM CORTEX M3 PROCESSOR
USING KEIL MDK ARM (Minimum of 2 Experiments has to be performed)
1 Write an assembly program to multiply of 2 16-bit binary numbers.
2 Write an assembly program to find the sum of first 10 integers numbers.
3 Write a program to toggle LED every second using timer interrupt

Equipment Required:

1. Regulated Power supplies

2. Analog/Digital Storage Oscilloscopes
3. 8086 Microprocessor kits
4. 8051 microcontroller kits
5. ADC module, DAC module
6. Stepper motor module
7. Key board module
8. LED, 7-SegemtUnits
9. Digital Multi-meters
10. ROM/RAM Interface module
11. Bread Board etc.
12. ARM CORTEX M3
13. KEIL MDKARM, Digital Multi-meters
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VLSI Design Lab
ECE
III B. Tech II Semester
Course Category Professional core Course Code 20EC6L09

Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5

Prerequisites Internal Assessment 15
Digital Electronics Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OBJECTIVES: To make the students familiarize with the

1 Design of analog and digital circuits.
Usage of EDA tool to simulate, draw schematic and layout, analyze, and test of analog
2
and digital circuits.
3 VHDL and Verilog Codes

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 write VHDL/Verilog code K3
use EDA tools to perform simulation, draw schematic and layout, K3
CO2
analysis,testing, and interpret results.
CO3 design analog and digital circuits K3
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2

CO2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2

CO3 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List of Experiments
PART (A): FPGA Level Implementation (Any Seven Experiments)
Note 1: The students need to develop Verilog /VHDL Source code, perform simulation
using relevant simulator and analyze the obtained simulation results using necessary
Synthesizer
Note 2: All the experiments need to be implemented on the latest FPGA/CPLD Hardware
in the Laboratory
Design and Implementation of the following:
1 Realization of Logic gates
4-bit ripple carry and carry look ahead adder using behavioral, dataflow and
2
structural modeling
a) 16:1 mux through 4:1 mux
3
b) 3:8 decoder realization through 2:4 decoder
4 8:3 encoder
5 8-bit parity generator and checker
6 Flip-Flops
7 8-bit synchronous up-down counter
8 4-bit sequence detector through Mealy and Moore state machines.
EDA Tools/Hardware Required:
1. EDA Tool that supports FPGA programming including Xilinx Vivado /Altera (Intel)/ Cypress/
Equivalent Industry standard tool along with corresponding FPGA hardware.
2. Desktop computer with appropriate Operating System that supports the EDA tools.
PART (B): Back-end Level Design and Implementation (Any Five Experiments)
Note: The students need to design the following experiments at schematic level using
CMOS logic and verify the functionality. Further students need to draw the corresponding
layout and verify the functionality including parasites. Available state of the art technology
libraries can be used while simulating the designs using Industry standard EDA Tools.
a. Universal Gates
1
b. An Inverter
2 Full Adder
3 Full Subtractor
4 Decoder
5 D-Flip-flop
EDA Tools/Hardware Required:
Mentor Graphics Software / Cadence/Synopsys/Tanner or Equivalent Industry Standard/CAD
Tool.
Desktop computer with appropriate Operating System that supports the EDA tools.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
(ECE)
III B Tech II Semester
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EC6L10
Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 0-0-3-1.5
Internal Assessment 25
Prerequisites Digital Signal Processing Theory Semester End Examination 50
Total Marks 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES: To make the students familiarize with the

1 Use of MATLAB software in implementing different DSP Algorithms.
2 Use of Python software in implementing different DSP Algorithms.
3 Use of CCS (TI) software in implementing different DSP Algorithms.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive Level
CO1 Understand, design, and analyze different DSP techniques K4
using MATLAB software.
CO2 Understand, design, and analyze different DSP techniques K4
using Python software.
CO3 Understand, design, and analyze different DSP techniques K4
using CCS software.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: (Total experiment to be concocted is 10)

Using MATLAB (minimum any two)
1. Compute and Compare of linear and circular convolution of two sequences.
2. Compute autocorrelation and cross-correlation of two sequences.
3. Frequency response of a discrete-time system.
4. Implementation of overlap add/overlap save method of linear filtering.
5. Implementing bit reversal.
6. Implementing N-point FFT algorithm and compare the result with DFT.
7. Implementation of LP FIR filters using different windows and compare.
8. Implementation of LP IIR filters using different windows and compare.
9. Implementation of interpolation and decimation process.
10. Implementation of sampling rate conversion.
11. Implementation of any adaptive filter.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Using Python (minimum any two)

1. Compute and Compare of linear and circular convolution of two sequences.
2. Compute autocorrelation and cross-correlation of two sequences.
3. Frequency response of a discrete-time system.
4. Implementation of overlap add/overlap save method of linear filtering.
5. Implementing bit reversal.
6. Implementing N-point FFT algorithm and compare the result with DFT.
7. Implementation of LP FIR filters using different windows and compare.
8. Implementation of LP IIR filters using different windows and compare.
9. Implementation of interpolation and decimation process.
10. Implementation of sampling rate conversion.
11. Implementation of any adaptive filter.

Using CCS (minimum any two)

1. Compute and Compare of linear and circular convolution of two sequences.
2. Compute autocorrelation and cross-correlation of two sequences.
3. Frequency response of a discrete-time system.
4. Implementation of overlap add/overlap save method of linear filtering.
5. Implementing bit reversal.
6. Implementing N-point FFT algorithm and compare the result with DFT.
7. Implementation of LP FIR filters using different windows and compare.
8. Implementation of LP IIR filters using different windows and compare.
9. Implementation of interpolation and decimation process.
10. Implementation of sampling rate conversion.
11. Implementation of any adaptive filter.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ARM / AURDINO BASED PROGRAMMING
(ECE)
III B.Tech II Semester

Course Category Skill Oriented Course Code 20EC6S03

Course Type Laboratory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3

Internal Assessment 15
Prerequisites Embedded Systems 35
Semester End Examination
Total Marks 50

COURSEOBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will

1 understand fundamentals of Interfacing techniques

Know various communication technologies and the connectivity of devices using web
2
and internet in the IoT environment.

COURSEOUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1
Establish Serial Communication link with Arduino K2

CO2 Analyze basics of SPI interface K3

CO3
Interface Stepper Motor with Arduino K3
CO4
Analyze Accelerometer interface techniques K2

K1:Remember,K2:Understand,K3:Apply,K4:Analyze,K5:Evaluate,K6:Create.

ContributionofCourseOutcomestowardsachievementofProgramOutcomes(1–Low,2 -
Medium,3 –High)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 2 1 2

CO2 2 2 2 2 2 1

CO3 1 2 2 2 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

List of Experiments:
1. Measure Analog signal from Temperature Sensor.

2. Generate PWM output

3. Drive single character generation on Hyper Terminal.

4. Drive a given string on Hyper Terminal

5. Full duplex Link establishment using Hyper terminal.

6. Drive a given value on a 8 bit DAC consisting of SPI

7. Drive Stepper motor using Analog GPIOs

8. Drive Accelerometer and Display the readings on Hyper Terminal

 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS
(ECE)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional elective-3 Course Code 20EC7T31
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Analog and digital Semester End 70
Communication Systems Basics Examination Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student willunderstand

The Functionality Of Each Of The Fiber Optic Communication System , and Principles Of
1
Single And Multi-Mode Optical Fibers Characteristics
The Optical Fiber Properties Of That Affect The Performance Of A Communication
2
Link And Types Of Fiber Materials With Their Properties And The Losses Occur In Fibers.
3 The Working Principle Of Optical Sources And Detectors
4 The Various Methods Of Source To Fiber Power Launching.
5 The Optical Links For Optical Communication System

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Level
To Understand necessary components required in modern optical
CO1 communications systems, and characteristics of fiber K2
CO2 To Calculate Power loss based on dispersions and distortions, K2
CO3 To Analyze the characteristics of various optical sources and detectors. K3
CO4 To understand optical networks with the help of optical topology.. K2
CO5 To Analyze optical links for analog and digital communication systems K3
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of

Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
OVERVIEW OF OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATION AND
FIBER MATERIALS: Historical development, The general system, advantages of
optical fiber communications. Optical fiber wave guides- Introduction, Ray theory
UNIT I transmission, Total Internal Reflection, Acceptance angle, Numerical Aperture, Skew
rays, Cylindrical fibers- Modes, V-number, Mode coupling, Step Index fibers, Graded
Index fibers, Single mode fibers- Cut off wavelength, Mode Field Diameter, Effective
Refractive Index, Related problems, Glass halide, chalcogenide fibers, plastic optic
fibers, active glass fibers.
OPTICAL FIBER COMPONENTS: Connector types, Single mode fiber
connectors, Connector return loss, Fiber Splices- Fusion Splices, mechanical splices,
UNIT II Splicing single mode fibers, Fiber alignment and joint loss- Multimode fiber joints,
single mode fiber joints.
LOSES AND DISPERSION: Signal distortion in optical fibers-Attenuation,
Absorption, Scattering and Bending losses, Core and Cladding losses, Group delay,
Types of Dispersion: - Material dispersion, Wave-guide dispersion, Polarization-
Mode dispersion, Intermodal dispersion, Pulse broadening in Graded index fiber,
CNR, Related problems.
OPTICAL SOURCES: LEDs, Structures, Materials, Quantum efficiency, Power,
Modulation, Power bandwidth product. Injection Laser Diodes- Modes, Threshold
conditions, External quantum efficiency, Laser diode rate equations, Resonant
UNIT III frequencies, Reliability of LED and ILD.
OPTICAL DETECTORS- Physical principles of PIN and APD, Detector response
time, Temperature effect on Avalanche gain, Comparison of Photo detectors, Noise
in detection process, Related problems.
SOURCE TO FIBER POWER LAUNCHING: Output patterns, Power coupling,
Power launching, Equilibrium Numerical Aperture, Optical network concepts,
UNIT IV Topologies, Laser diode to fiber coupling, Optical receiver
operation- Fundamental receiver operation, Digital signal transmission, Probability
of error ,error sources. High performance Optical receivers, Trans Impedance
Amplifiers.
OPTICAL SYSTEM DESIGN: Point-to- point links- Component choice and
UNIT V considerations, Link power budget, Rise time budget with examples, Line coding in
Optical links, WDM, Necessity, Principles, Measurement of Attenuation and
Dispersion, Eye pattern, Analog links, Introduction to Free–space Optical
Communication (FSO).

TEXT BOOKS
1. Optical Fiber Communications – John M. Senior, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2002.
Optical Fiber Communications – Gerd Keiser, McGraw-Hill International edition, 3rd
2.
Edition, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Fiber Optic Communications Fundamentals and Applications—shivakumar,M.Jamal
1.
Deen, wiley,2014
2. Fiber Optic Communication Systems – Govind P. Agarwal , John Wiley, 3rd Edition, 2004
Fiber Optic Communications – D.K. Mynbaev , S.C. Gupta and Lowell L. Scheiner,
3.
PearsonEducation,2005.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
ECE
IV B. Tech, I Semester

Course Category Program Elective Course Code 20EC7T32

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0--3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Signals and Systems,
Semester End Examination 70
Digital Signal Processing
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will

1 Learn basic concepts of digital image processing and image transforms.
Familiarize with image enhancement methods like spatial and frequency domain
2
filtering methods
3 Familiarize with image restoration techniques.
4 Learn various image compression models and image segmentation fundamentals.
5 Learn the basic concepts of color and morphological image processing

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Perform image manipulations ,different digital image processing
CO1 K2
techniques and transform techniques
Understand different image Enhancement techniques in spatial and
CO2 K2
frequency domain,
implement algorithms that perform noise removal in images using
CO3 K3
filtering techniques
Analyze different coding techniques for image compression and
CO4 K4
understand the concepts of segmentation methods.
Understand the concepts of colour and morphological image processing
CO5 K2
algorithms.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 2 - 1 2 - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 2 1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 1
CO4 2 2 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Introduction: Evolution of Digital image processing, Examples of fields that use
digital image processing, Fundamental steps in digital image processing,
components of an image processing system, image sensing and acquisition, image
sampling and quantization, some basic relationships between pixels, an
introduction to the mathematical tools used in digital image processing.
UNIT I
Image Transforms: Need for image transforms, Discrete Fourier transform
(DFT) of one variable, Extension to functions of two variables, some properties of
the 2-D Discrete Fourier transform, Discrete Cosine transform, Haar Transform,
Slant transform, KL Transform, SVD Transform, Comparison of different image
transforms.
Image Enhancement in Spatial domain & Frequency Domain: Need for Image
Enhancement, Some basic intensity transformation functions, histogram
processing, fundamentals of spatial filtering, smoothing spatial filters , sharpening
UNIT II spatial filters, Combining spatial enhancement methods.
The Basics of filtering in the frequency domain, image smoothing using
frequency domain filters, Image Sharpening using frequency domain filters,
Selective filtering
Image Restoration : A model of the image degradation / Restoration
process, Noise models, restoration in the presence of noise only-Spatial
Filtering, Periodic Noise Reduction by frequency domain filtering, Linear,
UNIT III
Position –Invariant Degradations, Estimating the degradation function, Inverse
filtering, Minimum mean square error (Wiener) filtering, constrained least squares
filtering ,geometric mean filter
Image Compression: Need for image compression, Huffman coding, Arithmetic
coding, LZW coding, Run-length coding, Bit Plane coding, Block Transform
coding, Predictive coding (lossless and lossy),sub band coding, Wavelet coding.
UNIT IV
Image standards (JPEG, MPEG, GIF).
Image Segmentation: Fundamentals, Point, Line and Edge detection, Region based
segmentation, Edge detection, Edge linking, Thresholding.
Morphological Image Processing: Preliminaries, Erosion and dilation, opening
and closing, basic morphological algorithms for boundary extraction, thinning,
gray-scale Morphology, Segmentation using morphological watersheds.
UNIT V Color image processing: color fundamentals, color models, pseudo color image
processing, basics of full color image processing, color transformations,
smoothing and sharpening. Image segmentation based on color, noise in color
images, color image compression.

TEXT BOOKS
1. R. C. Gonzalez and R. E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, 3rdedition, Prentice Hall, 2008.
Jayaraman, S. Esakkirajan, and T. Veerakumar,‖ Digital Image Processing‖, Tata
2.
McGraw-Hill Education, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS
Anil K.Jain, ―Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‖, Prentice Hall of India, 9th
1.
Edition, Indian Reprint, 2002.
2. B.Chanda, D.DuttaMajumder, ―Digital Image Processing and Analysis‖, PHI, 2009
3. S.Sridhar,‖Digital Image Processing‖. Oxford university press ,2011
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Low Power VLSI Design

ECE
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Elective Course Code 20EC7T33
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30M
VLSI Design Semester End Examination 70M
Total Marks 100M

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 the sources of power dissipation

2 the scaling of device parameters
3 the bus-encoding, clock-gating and FSM power minimization
4 the techniques to reduce the leakage power
5 the low power clock distribution analysis and simulation analysis

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand sources of power dissipation K2
CO2 Understand the scaling of device parameters K2
CO3 Understand bus-encoding, clock-gating and FSM power minimization K2
CO4 Understand the techniques to reduce the leakage power K2
Understand the low power clock distribution analysis and simulation
CO5 K2
analysis

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Sources of Power Dissipation: Introduction, Short-Circuit Power Dissipation,
Switching Power Dissipation, Dynamic Power for a Complex Gate, Reduced
UNIT I Voltage Swing, Switching Activity, Leakage Power Dissipation, p–n Junction
Reverse-Biased Current, Band-to-Band Tunneling Current, Sub threshold
Leakage Current, Short-Channel Effects
Supply Voltage Scaling for Low Power Device: Feature Size Scaling, Constant-
Field Scaling, Constant-Voltage Scaling, Architectural-Level Approaches:
Parallelism for Low Power, Pipelining for Low Power, Combining Parallelism
UNIT II
with Pipelining, Voltage Scaling Using High-Level Transformations: Multilevel
Voltage Scaling Challenges in MVS Voltage Scaling Interfaces, Static Timing
Analysis Dynamic Voltage and Frequency Scaling
Probabilistic Power Analysis: Random logic signals, probability and frequency,
probabilistic power analysis techniques, signal entropy
UNIT III Switched Capacitance Minimization: Bus Encoding: Gray Coding, One-Hot
Coding, Bus-Inversion, T0 Coding, Clock Gating, Gated-Clock FSMs, FSM State
Encoding, FSM Partitioning, Precomputation, Glitching Power Minimization
Leakage Power Minimization: Fabrication of Multiple Threshold Voltages,
Multiple Channel Doping, Multiple Oxide CMOS, Multiple Channel Length,
Multiple Body Bias, VTCMOS Approach, MTCMOS Approach, Power Gating,
UNIT IV
Clock Gating Versus Power Gating, Power-Gating Issues, Isolation Strategy,
State Retention Strategy, Power-Gating Controller, Power Management,
Combining DVFS and Power Management
Low power clock distribution& Simulation Power Analysis: Low power clock
distribution: Power dissipation in clock distribution, single driver versus
distributed buffers, zero skew versus tolerable skew, chip and package co design
for clock network.
UNIT V Simulation Power Analysis: SPICE circuit simulators, gate level logic
simulation, capacitive power estimation, architecture level analysis, data
correlation analysis of DSP systems, Monte Carlo Simulation Special
Techniques: Power Reduction in Clock networks, CMOS Floating Node, Low
Power Bus Delay balancing, and Low Power Techniques for SRAM.

TEXT BOOKS
Low power design methodologies- Massoud Pedram, Jan M. Rabaey, Kluwer Academic
1.
Publishers
2. Low-Power VLSI Circuits and Systems, Ajit Pal, 2015, SPRINGER PUBLISHERS
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Low Power CMOS Design – Anantha Chandrakasan, IEEE Press/Wiley International, 1998.
Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design, Gary Yeap from Motorola, SPRINGER
2.
SCIENCE+BUSINESS MEDIA, LLC..
Low Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design – A. Bellamour, M. I. Elamasri, Kluwer Academic
3.
Press, 1995.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
(ECE)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Professional elective Course Code 20EC7T34
Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Digital Communications Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 the basic concepts, applications, frequencies used in satellite communications
2 the various satellite subsystems and its functionality.
the concepts of satellite link design and calculation of C/N ratio. and to
3
understand the concepts of the transmitters, receivers, antennas, tracking systems of satellite
the concepts of multiple access and various types of multiple access
4
techniques in satellite systems
5 Know the concepts of satellite navigation, architecture and applications of GPS and know
the various applications of satellites.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 To Understand the basic principles of satellite systems. K2
CO2 To Analyze Satellite subsystems. K2
To Design the link budget of a satellite for specified C/N ratios. Know the
CO3 K3
concepts of satellite earth station technologies
CO4 To understand Configure the satellite multiple access techniques. K2
CO5 To develop the satellite navigation and GPS and understand the
K3
applications of satellites.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of

Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 1 2 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
INTRODUCTION: Origin of Satellite Communications, Historical Back-ground,
Basic Concepts of Satellite Communications, Frequency allocations for Satellite
Services, Applications, Future Trends of Satellite Communications.
UNIT I
ORBITAL MECHANICS AND LAUNCHERS: Orbital Mechanics, Look Angle
determination, Orbital perturbations, Orbit determination, launches and launch
vehicles, Orbital effects in communication systems performance.
SATELLITE SUBSYSTEMS: Attitude and orbit control system, telemetry,
UNIT II tracking, Command and monitoring, power systems, communication
subsystems, Satellite antenna Equipment reliability and Space qualification
SATELLITE LINK DESIGN: Basic transmission theory, system noise
temperature and G/T ratio, Design of down links, up link design, Design of satellite
links for specified C/N, System design example.
EARTH STATION TECHNOLOGY: Introduction, Transmitters, Receivers,
UNIT III
Antennas, Tracking systems, Terrestrial interface, Primary power test methods.
Low earth orbit and geo-stationary satellite systems: Orbit consideration,
coverage and frequency considerations, Delay and Throughput considerations,
System considerations, Operational NGSO constellation Designs.
MULTIPLE ACCESS: Frequency division multiple access (FDMA)
Intermediation, Calculation of C/N, Time division Multiple Access (TDMA), Frame
structure, Examples. Satellite Switched TDMA Onboard processing,
UNIT IV
DAMA, Code Division Multiple access (CDMA), Spread spectrum transmission
and reception, PN Sequence, Direct Sequence and Frequency Hopped Spread
Spectrum System.
SATELLITE NAVIGATION AND THE GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM: Radio and Satellite Navigation, GPS Position Location principles,
GPS Receivers and codes, Satellite signal acquisition, GPS Navigation Message,
GPS signal levels, GPS receiver operation, GPS C/A code accuracy, Differential
GPS.
UNIT V
SATELLITE APPLICATIONS: INTELSAT Series, INSAT, VSAT, Mobile
satellite services: GSM, GPS, INMARSAT, LEO, MEO, Satellite Navigational
System. Direct Broadcast satellites (DBS)- Direct to home Broadcast (DTH),
Digital audio broadcast (DAB)- World space services, Business TV (BTV),
GRAMSAT, Specialized services – E –mail, Video conferencing, Internet.

TEXT BOOKS
Satellite Communications Engineering – Wilbur L.Pritchard, Robert A Nelson and
1.
Henri G.Suyderhoud, 2nd Edition, Pearson Publications, 2003.
2. Satellite communication -- Pratt and Bostian, John Wiley and Sons, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS
Satellite Communications : Design Principles – M. Richharia, BS Publications, 2nd
1.
Edition, 2003.
2. Bruce R. Elbert, ―Satellite Communication Applications‖, Hand Book, Artech House Bostan
London, 1997
3. Satellite Communication concepts and applications N.Raja Rao , 2nd edition
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105131/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Embedded Systems
(ECE)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course
Professional Elective Course Code 20EC7T35
Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites 1.C Programming Internal Assessment 30
2.Microprocessors and Semester End Examination 70
Microcontrollers Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 the basics of Embedded System and demonstrate real time applications
2 a physical model of an Application by studying all hardware components required and
Develop software program for a simple Embedded Application

3 The basic concepts of RTOS

4 an Embedded System by learning hardware and Software Co-Design Approaches

5 the basic concepts of Robotics.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the basics of Embedded System and demonstrate real time
K2
applications
CO2 Build a physical model of an Application by studying all hardware
components required and Develop software program for a simple K3
Embedded Application
CO3 Outline basic concepts of RTOS K2
CO4 Develop an Embedded System by learning hardware and Software Co-
K5
Design Approaches
CO5 Summarize the basic concepts of Robotics. K2
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of

Program Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 1

CO2 1 2 2 1 1

CO3 1 2 1 1

CO4 2 2 1 1

CO5 2 2 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Embedded Systems Introduction: Embedded System Definition, Embedded
System Vs General Purpose Computing System, Classification& Characteristics of
UNIT I Embedded Systems, Embedded System Block Diagram, Real time Examples of
Application Specific (Washing Machine, Digital camera) & Domain Specific
(Automotive vehicle) Embedded Systems.
Embedded Hardware & Firmware Design Hardware Design: Analog & Digital
Electronic Components, Serial Communication Devices (I2C, SPI,CAN), Embedded
System Design flow.
UNIT II
Software Design: Embedded Firmware Design approaches, Development Languages,
ISR Concept, Interrupt Service Mechanism, Basic concepts Embedded C and Sample
programs

Real Time Operating System : Operating System Basics, Types of OS, Kernel
Architecture, Tasks, process and Threads, Task Scheduling, Threads, Process
UNIT III
Scheduling, Task Communication & Synchronization, Examples of handheld & Real
time Operating systems.

Hardware Software Co-Design & Testing: Fundamental Issues in Hardware

Software Co-Design, Hardware Software Trade-offs, Integration of Hardware &
Firmware.
UNIT IV Testing: The main software utility tool, Translation tools-Pre- processors,
Interpreters, Compilers and Linkers, Debugging tools, Quality assurance and testing
of the design, Testing on host machine, Simulators,
Laboratory Tools
Introduction to Robotics: Definition and origin of robotics, Classification &
generation of Robots, General Block diagram of robot, sensors and actuators - IR
UNIT V
Sensors, Ultrasonic sensors, Vision devices (Kinect sensor), Accelerometers,
Electrical, Hydraulic Actuators.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Introduction to Embedded Systems, Shibu K V, TMH Education.
2. Introduction to Robotics, Phillip McKerrow, Wesley Publishing Company,1991
Architecture, Programming and Design, 2nd Edition, Raj Kamal, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Embedded and Real time applications , KVKK Prasad, Dreamtech press2005

2. Introduction to Robotics, John J.Craig ,,Pearson, 2009

3. Embedded System Design A unified Hardware/Software Introduction, Frank Vahid/Tony
Givargis, John Wiley &Sons,Inc.
WEB RESOURCES
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117103063
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Digital IC Design using CMOS
ECE
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Elective Course Code 20EC7T36
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
DICA ,VLSI Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 about static and dynamic characteristics of MOS Inverters.
2 the design of combinational logic gates in CMOS.
3 Sequential logic circuits design in CMOS.
4 the design of basic Arithmetic building blocks.
5 the concept of semiconductor memories.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the concepts of MOS Design K2
CO2 Design and analysis of Combinational MOS Circuits. K4
CO3 Design and analysis of Sequential MOS Circuits. K4
CO4 Extend the Digital IC Design to Different Applications. K2
Understand the Concepts of Semiconductor Memories, Flash
CO5 K2
Memory, RAM array organization.

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 - 1 - - 2 - - - - - - - 1 2
CO2 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 2
CO3 2 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 2
CO4 - 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - 1 2
CO5 2 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - - 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
MOS Design: Pseudo NMOS Logic – Inverter, Inverter threshold voltage, Output
high voltage, Output Low voltage, Gain at gate threshold voltage, Transient
UNIT I
response, Rise time, Fall time, Pseudo NMOS logic gates, Transistor equivalency,
CMOS Inverter logic.
Combinational MOS Logic Circuits: MOS logic circuits with NMOS loads,
Primitive CMOS logic gates – NOR & NAND gate, Complex Logic circuits design
UNIT II – Realizing Boolean expressions using NMOS gates and CMOS gates , AOI and
OIA gates, CMOS full adder, CMOS transmission gates, Designing with
Transmission gates.
Sequential MOS Logic Circuits: Behavior of bistable elements, SR Latch, Clocked
UNIT III
latch and flip flop circuits, CMOS D latch and edge triggered flip-flop.
Dynamic Logic Circuits: Basic principle, Voltage Bootstrapping, Synchronous
UNIT IV dynamic pass transistor circuits, Dynamic CMOS transmission gate logic, High
performance Dynamic CMOS circuits.
Interconnect: Capacitive Parasitics, Resistive Parasitics, Inductive Parasitics,
Advanced Interconnect Techniques.
Semiconductor Memories: Memory Types, RAM array organization, DRAM –
UNIT V
Types, Operation, Leakage currents in DRAM cell and refresh operation, SRAM
operation Leakage currents in SRAM cells, Flash Memory- NOR flash and NAND
flash.

TEXT BOOKS
Digital Integrated Circuits – A Design Perspective, Jan M. Rabaey, AnanthaChandrakasan,
1.
BorivojeNikolic, 2nd Ed., PHI.
2. Digital Integrated Circuit Design – Ken Martin, Oxford University Press, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits Analysis and Design – Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici,
1.
TMH, 3rd Ed., 2011.
2. CMOS VLSI Design – Neil H.E Weste, David harris, Ayan Banerjee 3rd Edition, Pearson
Introduction to VLSI Systems: A Logic, Circuit and System Perspective, Ming - BO Lin,
3.
CRC Press, 2011.
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://subodhtripathi.files.wordpress.com/2012/01/0072460539cmos1.pdf
2. highered.mheducation.com/sites/0072460539/index.html
3. https://www.slideshare.net/.../105926921-cmos digital integrated circuits solution manual.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RADAR ENGINEERING
(ECE)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Elective Course Code 20EC7T37
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
EMTL, MWE Internal Assessment 30
Prerequisites Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES: By studying this course the student will learn

1 The Basic Principle of radar and radar range equation.
2 Different types of radars; CW, FM-CW.
3 MTI and pulse Doppler radars performance, different tracking techniques for radar
4 The characteristics of a matched filter receiver and its performance.
5 Different types of displays, duplexers and antennas used in radar systems.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive
Level
CO1 Familiarize the fundamentals of basic radar. K2
CO2 Doppler Effect to detect moving targets. K1
CO3 Analyze the MTI radar performance and radar tracking methods. K4
Apply the concepts of matched filter and ambiguity functions in detection
CO4 K4
of radar signals in noise.
CO5 Design radar receiver based on characteristics of duplexer and antennas K1
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - - 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - - 1 1 1
CO4 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO5 2 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - - 1 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
BASICS OF RADAR: Introduction, Maximum Unambiguous Range, simple
Radar range Equation, Radar Block Diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies and
Applications. Prediction of Range Performance, Minimum Detectable Signal,
UNIT I Receiver Noise, Illustrative Problems. Radar Equation : Modified Radar Range
Equation, SNR, probability of detection, probability of False Alarm, Integration
of Radar Pulses, Radar Cross Section of Targets (simple targets - sphere, cone-
sphere), Creeping Wave, Transmitter Power, PRF and Range Ambiguities, System
Losses(qualitative treatment), Illustrative Problems
CW AND FREQUENCY MODULATED RADAR : Doppler Effect, CW Radar–
Block Diagram, Isolation between Transmitter and Receiver, Non-zero IF Receiver,
UNITII Receiver Bandwidth Requirements, Applications of CW radar. Illustrative Problem.
FM-CW Radar: Range and Doppler Measurement, Block Diagram and
Characteristics, FM-CW altimeter, Multiple Frequency CW Radar
MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR: Introduction, Principle, MTI Radar with
- Power Amplifier Transmitter and Power Oscillator Transmitter, Delay Line
Cancellers – Filter Characteristics, Blind Speeds, Double Cancellation, Nth
Cancellation Staggered PRFs. Range Gated Doppler Filters. MTI Radar
UNITIII Parameters, Limitations to MTI Performance, MTI versus Pulse Doppler Radar.
TRACKING RADAR: Tracking with Radar, Sequential Lobing, Conical Scan,
Mono pulse Tracking Radar – Amplitude Comparison Mono pulse (one- and two-
coordinates), Phase Comparison Mono pulse, Tracking in Range, Acquisition and
Scanning Patterns, Comparison of Trackers.
DETECTION OF RADAR SIGNALS IN NOISE : Introduction, Matched Filter
UNITIV Receiver – Response Characteristics and Derivation, Correlation detection and
Cross- correlation Receiver, Efficiency of Non-matched Filters, Matched Filter
with Non-white Noise, Noise Figure and Noise Temperature.
RADAR RECEIVERS: Duplexers – Branch type and Balanced type, Circulators as
UNITV Duplexers, Radar Displays. PHASED ARRAY RADAR -Introduction to Basic
Concepts, Radiation Pattern, Beam Steering and Beam Width changes, Series
versus parallel feeds, Applications, Advantages and Limitations. Radomes.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Introduction to Radar Systems -M.I. Skolnik, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Book,1981.
2. Understanding of RADAR Systems - Simon Kingsley and Shaun Quegan, , McGraw Hill
Book, 1993.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Radar Engineering and Fundamentals of Navigational Aids -G S N Raju, IK International
Publishers, 2008.
2. Microwave and Radar Engineering, G.SasiBhushana Rao,Pearson education, 2013
3. Fundamental of Microwave & Radar Engineering By K. K. Sharma · 2011
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105154/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INTERNET OF THINGS
ECE
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course
Professional Elective Course Code 20EC7T38
Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Electronics and Devices 30
Internal Assessment
Circuits, Embedded systems, Semester End Examination 70
wireless sensor Networks. Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
CO1 To introduce the terminology, technology and its applications
CO2 To Implement Data and Knowledge Management and use of Devices in IoT Technology
CO3 To introduce the concept of M2M (machine to machine) with necessary protocols
CO4 To classify Real World IoT Design Constraints, Industrial Automation in IoT.
CO5 To introduce the Raspberry PI platform, that is widely used in IoT applications
CO1 To introduce the Python Scripting Language which is used in many IoT devices

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the building blocks of Internet of Things and characteristics K1
Appraise the role of IoT protocols for efficient network communication.
CO2 K2
Elaborate the need for Data Analytics and Security in IoT
Realize the difference between M2M and IOT. Explain IOT physical
CO3 K3
devices.
CO4 Analyze the domain specific applications of IoT K4
Develop Internet of Things & Logical Design using Python. Develop
CO5 K5
real life IoT based projects
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Internet of Things –Definition and Characteristics of IoT, Physical
Design of IoT – IoT Protocols, IoT communication models, IoT Communication
UNIT I APIs IoT enabled Technologies – Wireless Sensor Networks, Cloud Computing,
Big data analytics, Communication protocols, Embedded Systems, IoT Levels and
Templates
Machine to Machine, Difference between IoT and M2M, SDN and NFV for
IOT, difference between SDN and NFV for IoT Basics of IoT System
UNIT II
Management with NETCOZF, YANG- NETCONF, YANG, SNMP
NETOPEER
What is an IOT Device, Exemplary Device: Arduino IoT Physical Devices and
Endpoints - Introduction to Raspberry PI-Interfaces (serial, SPI, I2C) Computing
UNIT III
(Arduino, Raspberry Pi), Communication, Sensing, Actuation, I/O interfaces.
Communication Protocols-MQTT, ZigBee, Bluetooth, CoAP, UDP, TCP
Home Automation, Cities, Environment, Energy, Retail, Logistics, Agriculture,
UNIT IV
Industry, Health & Lifestyle Industry applications, Surveillance applications,
Introduction, IOT Design Methodology, Installing Python, Python Data Types &
UNIT V Data Structures, Control Flow, Functions, Modules, Packages, File Handling, Date /
Time Operations, Classes, Python Packages of interest for IOT

TEXT BOOKS
Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach), Vijay Madisetti and Arshdeep Bahga, 1 st
1.
Edition, VPT, 2014. (ISBN: 978-8173719547)
Internet of Things, Srinivasa K.G., Siddesh, G.M., Hanumantha Raju R. Cengage
2.
Publications, 1st Edition 2018
REFERENCE BOOKS
Internet of Things: Architecture and Design Principles, Raj Kamal, 1st Edition, McGraw
1.
Hill Education, 2017. (ISBN: 978-9352605224
2. Designing the Internet of Things, Adrian McEwen, 1stEdition, Wiley Publishers, 2014
Getting Started with Raspberry Pi, Matt Richardson & Shawn Wallace, O'Reilly (SPD),
3. 2014,
ISBN: 9789350239759
4 Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things Alasdair Gilchrist Publications: Apress
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/internet-of-things
2. https://www.class-central.com/tag/internet%20of%20things
https://www.businessinsider.com/internet-of-things-devices-applications-examples-2016-
3.
8?IR=T
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning
ECE
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Professional Elective Course Code 20EC7T39
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce the mathematical, statistical and theoretically about the Pattern Recognition
To introduce the students to the basic concepts and methods for the recognition of patterns
2
in data
To provide the student with a working knowledge of pattern recognition application
3
development process
Apply different algorithmic approaches for the detection and characterization of patterns in
4
multi-dimensional data
Understand and apply both supervised and unsupervised classification methods to detect
5
and characterize patterns in real-world data

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Collect and critically interpret relevant information to design a simple
CO1 K1
pattern recognition system
Identify the strengths and weaknesses of different pattern classification
CO2 K5
techniques
Implement different pattern classifiers. Apply various dimensionality
CO3 K3
reduction methods for feature selection or feature extraction.
CO4 Apply pattern recognition techniques to real-world problems K5
CO5 Evaluate the result from a simple pattern recognition system K6

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO2 2 2 - - - 2 - -
CO3 2 - - - 2 - - - 2 - - - 2 -
CO4 2 2 2 - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 2 2
CO5 - 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Pattern Recognition: Problem, applications, design cycle, learning
and adaption, examples, Probability Distributions, Parametric Learning – Maximum
UNIT I
likelihood and Bayesian Decision Theory- Bays rule, Discriminate functions, loss
functions and Bayesian error analysis
Linear models: Linear Models for Regression, Linear regression, logistic regression
UNIT II
Linear Models for Classification
Neural Network: Perceptron, multilayer, Back Propagation algorithm, error
surfaces, practical techniques for improving back propagation, additional networks
UNIT III
and training methods- Gradient descent, Newton method, Conjugate gradient,
Quasi-Newton method, and Levenberg Marquardt algorithm
Linear discriminate functions -Decision surfaces, two-category, minimum-
UNIT IV squared error procedures, the Ho kashyap procedures, linear programming
algorithms, support vector machine
Algorithm independent machine learning – Lack of internet superiority of any
classifier, bias and variance, re-sampling for classifier design, combining classifiers
UNIT V
Unsupervised learning and clustering- k-means clustering, fuzzy k-means
clustering, hierarchical clustering

TEXT BOOKS
Pattern Classification, Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart, David G. Stock ,2nd Edition John
1.
Wiley & Sons, 2001
2. Machine Learning by SaikatDutt, S. ChandramouliandA.K.Das, Pearson publication,2018
REFERENCE BOOKS
Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome H. Friedman, ―The Elements of Statistical
1.
Learning‖, 2nd Edition, Springer,2009.
2. C. Bishop, ―Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning‖, Springer,2006
S. Rajasekharan and G.A. Vijayalakshmipai ―Neural Networks Fuzzy Logic and genetic
3.
Algorithms‖.
WEB RESOURCES
1. http://www.neuraldesigner.com
2. http://www.scincedirect.com
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106046/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Highway Engineering
(Open Elective)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20CE7T11
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the students with the principles and practice of transportation engineering
1
which focuses on Highway Engineering.
Ability to mathematically develop and interpret design standards for horizontal and vertical
2
geometry and super elevation
3 To provide basic knowledge on materials used in pavement construction.
To enable the students to have a strong analytical and practical knowledge of Planning,
4
Designing of Pavements.
5 To provide basic knowledge in traffic engineering, and transportation planning.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Plan highway network for a given area. K1
CO2 Design the Highway geometrics based on highway alignment. K5
Characterize the pavement materials like aggregates, Bituminous
CO3 K3
materials &construction.
Judge suitability of pavement materials and design flexible and rigid
CO4 K5
pavements.
CO5 Design Intersections and prepare traffic management plans K6

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 1 1
CO2 1 3 2 1 1
CO3 1 1
CO4 1 2 2 1 1 2
CO5 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Highway Planning and Alignment: Highway development in India; Classification
of Roads; Road Network Patterns; Necessity for Highway Planning; Different Road
UNIT I Development Plans – First, second, third road development plans, road
development vision 2021, Rural Road Development Plan – Vision 2025; Planning
Surveys; Highway Alignment- Factors affecting
Alignment- Engineering Surveys – Drawings and Reports.
Highway Geometric Design: Importance of Geometric Design- Design controls and
Criteria- Highway Cross Section Elements- Sight Distance Elements-Stopping sight
UNIT II Distance, Overtaking Sight Distance and Intermediate Sight Distance- Design of
Horizontal Alignment- Design of Super elevation and Extra widening- Design of
Transition Curves-Design of Vertical alignment- Gradients- Vertical curves.
Highway Materials: Sub-grade soil: classification –Group Index – Subgrade soil
UNIT III strength – California Bearing Ratio – Modulus of Subgrade Reaction. Stone
aggregates: Desirable properties – Tests for Road Aggregates – Bituminous
Materials: Types – Desirable properties -Tests on Bitumen .
Design of Pavements: Types of pavements; Functions and requirements of different
components of pavements; Design Factors Flexible Pavements: Design factors –
Flexible Pavement Design Methods – CBR method – IRC method – Burmister
UNIT IV method – Mechanistic method – IRC Method for Low volume Flexible pavements.
Rigid Pavements: Design Considerations – wheel load stresses – Temperature
stresses – Frictional stresses – Combination of stresses – Design of slabs – Design
of Joints – IRC method – Rigid pavements for low volume roads – Continuously
Reinforced Cement Concrete Pavements – Roller Compacted Concrete Pavements.
Traffic Engineering: Basic Parameters of Traffic-Volume, Speed and Density-
Traffic Volume Studies; Speed studies –spot speed and speed & delay studies;
Parking Studies; Road Accidents- Causes and Preventive measures - Condition
UNIT V Diagram and Collision Diagrams; PCU Factors, Capacity of Highways – Factors
Affecting; LOS Concepts; Road Traffic Signs; Road markings; Types of
Intersections; At-Grade Intersections – Design of Plain, Flared, Rotary and
Channelized Intersections; Design of Traffic Signals –Webster Method –IRC
method.

TEXT BOOKS
Highway Engineering‘ by Paul H. Wright and Karen K Dixon, Wiley Student Edition,
1.
Wiley India (P) Ltd., New Delhi.
Highway Engineering‘ by Khanna S.K., Justo C.E.G and Veeraragavan A, Nem Chand
2.
Bros, Roorkee.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Transportation Engineering and Planning‘ by Papacostas C.S. and PD Prevedouros,
1.
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd; New Delhi.
2. ‗Highway Engineering‘ by Srinivasa Kumar R, Universities Press, Hyderabad
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/downloads/105101087/
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Battery Management Systems and Charging Stations

(Open Elective – III offered to other departments)

Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EE7T29
Courses
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites NIL Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To discuss about the different types of batteries.
2 To describe about the battery characteristic & parameters.
3 To apply the concepts of battery management system and design the battery pack.
4 To explain about the battery testing, disposal and recycling.
5 To describe different methods of EV charging

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive
Level
CO1 Discuss about the different types of batteries. K2
CO2 Describe about the battery characteristic & parameters. K2
Apply the concepts of battery management system and design the
CO3 K3
battery pack.
CO4 Explain about the battery testing, disposal and recycling. K2
CO5 Describe different methods of EV charging K2
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 1 1 1
CO4 2 - - - 1 1 1 - - - - 1 1 1
CO5 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 1

COURSE CONTENT
Batteries
Lead Acid Battery, Nickel based batteries, Sodium based batteries, Lithium based
batteries – Li-ion & Li-poly, Metal Air Battery, Zinc Chloride battery; Ultra
UNIT 1
capacitors; Flywheel Energy Storage System; Hydraulic Energy Storage System;
Comparison of different Energy Storage System Suggested reading: Study of
different types of batteries
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Battery Characteristics & Parameters
Cells and Batteries- conversion of chemical energy to electrical energy- Battery
Specifications: Variables to characterize battery operating conditions and
Specifications to characterize battery nominal and maximum characteristics;
UNIT 2
Efficiency of batteries; Electrical parameters Heat generation- Battery design
Performance criteria for Electric vehicles batteries- Vehicle propulsion factors-
Power and energy requirements of batteries- Meeting battery performance criteria-
setting new targets for battery performance.
Battery Pack and Battery Management System
Selection of battery for EVs & HEVs, Traction Battery Pack design, Requirement of
Battery Monitoring, Battery State of Charge Estimation methods, Battery Cell
UNIT 3 equalization problem, thermal control, protection interface, SOC Estimation, Energy
& Power estimation, Battery thermal management system, Battery Management
System: Definition, Parts: Power Module, Battery, DC/DC Converter, load,
communication channel, Battery Pack Safety, Battery Standards & Tests
Battery Testing, Disposal & Recycling
Chemical & structure material properties for cell safety and battery design, battery
testing, limitations for transport and storage of cells and batteries, Recycling, disposal
and second use of batteries. Battery Leakage: gas generation in batteries, leakage
UNIT 4 path, leakage rates. Ruptures: Mechanical stress and pressure tolerance of cells, safety
vents, Explosions: Causes of battery explosions, explosive process, Thermal Runway:
High discharge rates, Short circuits, charging and discharging. Environment and
Human Health impact assessments of batteries, General recycling issues and drivers,
methods of recycling of EV batteries.
Charging Stations
Electric Vehicle Technology and Charging Equipment‘s, Basic charging Block
Diagram of Charger, Difference between Slow charger and fast charger, Slow charger
UNIT 5
design rating, Fast charger design rating, AC charging and DC charging, Inboard and
off board charger specification, Type of Mode of charger Mode -2, Mode-3 and
Mode-4, EVSE associated charge times calculation.

TEXT BOOKS
1 Guangjin Zhao, ―Reuse and Recycling of Lithium-Ion Power Batteries‖, John Wiley &
Sons. 2017. (ISBN: 978-1-1193-2185-9)
2 Arno Kwade, Jan Diekmann, ―Recycling of Lithium-Ion Batteries: The LithoRec Way‖,
Springer, 2018. (ISBN: 978-3-319-70571-2)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Ibrahim Dinçer, Halil S. Hamut and Nader Javani, ―Thermal Management of Electric
Vehicle Battery Systems‖, John Wiley& Sons Ltd., 2016.
2 Chris Mi, Abul Masrur & David Wenzhong Gao, ―Hybrid electric Vehicle- Principles &
Applications with Practical Properties‖, Wiley, 2011.
3 G. Pistoia, J.P. Wiaux, S.P. Wolsky, ―Used Battery Collection and Recycling‖, Elsevier,
2001. (ISBN: 0-444-50562-8)‖
4 T R Crompton, ―Battery Reference Book-3 rd Edition‖, Newnes- Reed Educational and
Professional Publishing Ltd., 2000.
5 James Larminie, John Lowry, ―Electric Vehicle Technology Explained‖, John Wiley &
Sons Ltd, 2003.
WEB RESOURCES (Suggested)
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106170
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=omnQN5Z5vsA
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IV Year I Semester
ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING
(for CE, EEE, ECE, CSE, CSE(AIML), CSE(AI), CSE(DS), IT)

Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20ME7T28

Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites NIL Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
Students will learn
1 Fundamentals of rapid prototyping and concepts of liquid-based rapid prototyping systems
2 Concepts of solid-based rapid prototyping systems
3 Concepts of powder-based rapid prototyping systems
4 Different rapid tooling processes
Rapid prototyping data formats and applications of additive manufacturing in various
5
industries
COURSE OUTCOMES
Cogni
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: tive
Level
Explain the rapid prototyping fundamentals & choose different liquid based
CO1 K2
rapid prototyping processes for manufacturing
CO2 Choose different solid based rapid prototyping processes for manufacturing K2
CO3 Choose different powder based rapid prototyping processes for manufacturing K2
CO4 Choose different rapid tooling processes for prototyping manufacturing K2
CO5 Elaborate the uses of additive manufacturing processes in various industries. K2
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO2 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO4 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO5 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - 1 -

COURSE CONTENT
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION: Prototyping fundamentals, historical development, fundamentals of rapid
prototyping, advantages and limitations of rapid prototyping, commonly used terms,
classification of RP process.
LIQUID-BASED RAPID PROTOTYPING SYSTEMS: Stereo lithography Apparatus (SLA):
models and specifications, process, working principle, applications, advantages and
disadvantages, case studies. Photopolymers, photo polymerization, layering technology, laser
and laser scanning. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): models and specifications, process, working
principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

UNIT II
SOLID-BASED RAPID PROTOTYPING SYSTEMS: Laminated object manufacturing
(LOM) - models and specifications, process, working principle, applications, advantages and
disadvantages, case studies. Fused deposition modelling (FDM) - models and specifications,
process, working principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.

UNIT III
POWDER BASED RAPID PROTOTYPING SYSTEMS: Selective laser sintering (SLS):
models and specifications, process, working principle, applications, advantages and
disadvantages, case studies. Three-dimensional printing (3DP): models and specifications,
process, working principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies

UNIT IV
RAPID TOOLING: Introduction to rapid tooling (RT), conventional tooling Vs RT, Need for
RT. rapid tooling classification: indirect rapid tooling methods: spray metal deposition, RTV
epoxy tools, Ceramic tools, investment casting, spin casting, die casting, sand casting, 3D
Keltool process. Direct rapid tooling: direct AIM, LOM Tools, DTM Rapid Tool Process, EOS
Direct Tool Process and Direct Metal Tooling using 3DP.

UNIT V
ENHANCING ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING WITH REVERSE ENGINEERING:
Reverse engineering, uses of reverse engineering, Steps for reverse engineering in additive
manufacturing, 3D scanning techniques.
RP APPLICATIONS: Application in engineering, analysis and planning, aerospace industry,
automotive industry, jewelry industry, coin industry, GIS application, arts and architecture. RP
medical and bioengineering applications: planning and simulation of complex surgery,
customized implants & prosthesis.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., ―Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications‖,
Third Edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010.
2. Gebhardt A., ―Rapid prototyping‖, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., ―Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box
for prototype development‖, CRC Press, 2007.
2. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., ―Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice‖, Springer, 2006.
3. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., ―Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications‖,
CRC press, 2000.

WEB RESOURCES
1. nptel.ac.in/courses/112104204/47
2. nptel.ac.in/courses/112107078/37
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNz-
TM4zPkE&list=PLbTLRuAivTCR0YVCNxSTPI9lgccanmZLG
4. https://lecturenotes.in/m/46059-note-of-additive-manufacturing-by-madhura-
diwakar?reading=true
5. https://www.slideshare.net/badebhau/additive-manufacturing-processes-pdf-by-
badebhau4gmailcom
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Big Data Analytics

(Common to CSE, IT, CSE(AI&ML), CSE(AI), CSE(DS))
(Open Elective – III for CIVIL, EEE, MECH, ECE)
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20DS6T02
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Data Mining Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100
COURSEOBJECTIVES
1 To optimize business decisions and create competitive advantage with Big Data analytics
2 To learn to analyze the big data using intelligent techniques
3 To introduce programming tools PIG & HIVE in Hadoop echo system
COURSEOUTCOMES Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, thes tudent will be able to:
level
CO1 Illustrate big data challenges in different domains including social media, K2
transportation, finance and medicine
CO2 Enumerate and apply the features of Cassandra K2
CO3 Design and develop Hadoop and Map Reduce programs K3
CO4 Perform data analysis using Apache Spark K2
CO5 Analyze the data analytics process with a case study K3

K1:Remember,K2:Understand,K3:Apply,K4:Analyze,K5:Evaluate,K6:Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of
Program Outcomes (1–Low,2-Medium,3– High)
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - - 1
3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2 1
4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2 1
5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSECONTENT
Types of Digital Data: Classification of Digital Data. Introduction to Big Data:
Characteristic of Data, Evolution of Big Data, Definition of Big Data, Challenges
UNITI with Big Data, What is BigData?
Big Data Analytics: Where do we Begin?, What is Big Data Analytics?, What
Big Data Analytics isn‘t?, Classification of Analytics, Terminologies Used in Big
Data Environments. TheBig Data Technology Landscape: NoSQL.(Text Book 1)
Introduction to Cassandra: Apache Cassandra – An Introduction, Features of
Cassandra, CQL Data Types, CQLSH, Keyspaces, CRUD, Collections, Using a
UNITII Counter, Time to Live, Alter Commands, Import and Export.(Text Book 1)
Hadoop: Hadoop Overview, HDFS (Hadoop Distributed File System),Processing
UNITIII Data with Hadoop, Managing Resources and Applications with Hadoop YARN
(Yet another Resource Negotiator).
MAPREDUCE: Introduction to MAPREDUCE Programming: Introduction,
Mapper, Reducer, Combiner, Partitioner, Searching, Sorting, Compression.(Text
Book 1)
Introduction to Data Analysis with Spark: What is Apache Spark,A unified
UNITIV Spark, Who uses Spark and for what?, A Brief Historyof Spark, Spark version
and releases, Storage layers for Spark.
Programming with RDDs: RDD Basics, Creating RDDs, RDDOperations,
Passing functions to Spark, Common Transformationsand Actions,
Persistence.(Text Book 2)
JasperReport using Jaspersoft: Introduction to Jasper Reports, Connecting to
UNITV MongoDB NoSQL Database, Connecting to Cassandra NoSQL Database.
Few Interesting Differences: Difference between Data Warehouse and Data
Lake, Difference between RDBMS and HDFS, Difference between HDFS and
HBase, Difference between Hadoop Map Reduce and Spark, Difference between
Pig and Hive(Text Book 1)
TEXTBOOKS
1. Big Data and Analytics by Seema Acharya, Subhashini Chellappan, Second Edition, Wiley
India Pvt. Ltd., 2019
2. Learning Spark: Lightning-Fast Big Data Analysis by Andy Konwinski, Holden Karau,
Matei Zaharia, Patrick Wendell, First Edition, O‘Reilly, 2015
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Big Data Analytics, by Radha Shankarmani, M Vijayalakshmi, Second Edition, Wiley India
Pvt. Ltd., 2016
2. Bill Franks, ―Taming the Big Data Tidal Wave: Finding Opportunities in Huge Data
Streams with Advanced Analytics‖, John Wiley& sons, 2012.
3. Hadoop: The Definitive Guideby Tom White, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2009
4. Bart Baesens, ―Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its
Applications (WILEY Big Data Series)‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2014.
WEBRESOURCES
1. http://hadoop.apache.org/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106104189/
3. https://www.edx.org/course/big-data-fundamentals
4. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/big-data
5. https://www.wileyindia.com/big-data-and-analytics-2ed.html
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Organizational Behavior
(Open Elective)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20HM7T09
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Understand the meaning and importance of Organizational Behaviour to
CO1 K2
start and survive in corporate environment.
Demonstrate how the perception can integrate in human behaviour ,
CO2 K2
attitudes and values.
Understand the importance of Groups and Teams in organizations for
CO3 K2
better Decision making.
CO4 Understand the need for change and its importance in organizations. K2
Understand the culture of organizations and to apply techniques in
CO5 K3
dealing with stress in organizations.

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 1 3 2 3 2 1
CO3 1 2 3 3 2
CO4 1 3 3 2 2 1 2
CO5 3 1 2 2 2 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Organizational Behaviour
Concept-Nature and scope-Importance of Organizational Behaviour-Key elements
UNIT I of Organizational Behaviour-Role of managers in Organizational Behaviour-
Approaches to Organizational Behaviour-Perspectives of Human Behaviour-
Challenges and Opportunities for Organizational Behaviour.
Perceptual Management
UNIT II Nature-Process of Perception- Organization and Interpretation-Influencing factors-
Importance of Perception in OB - Perceptual Errors- Attitudes and Values –
Changes and Behaviour Modification Techniques-Impression Management.
Introduction to Groups and Teams
Meaning –Importance of Groups - Foundations of Group Behaviour –Reasons for
UNIT III Group formation-Group and Team-Types of Groups-Stages of Group development
–Meaning and Importance of Teams- Factors affecting Group and Team
performance-Types of teams-Creating an effective Team.
Organization Change and Development
Definition and Meaning - Need for change-Forces for changes in Organization-
UNIT IV Types of change-Organizational Resistance-Strategies overcome Resistance-
Process of change-Meaning and Definition of Organization Development-OD
interventions.
Organizational Culture and Organizational Stress
Organizational culture: Meaning and Nature of Organizational Culture-Functions-
UNIT V Types-Creating and maintain Organizational Culture-Managing Cultural Diversity.
Organizational Stress: Definition and Meaning-Sources of stress-Impact of stress
on organizations-Stress Management Techniques.

TEXT BOOKS
K.Aswathappa: ―Organizational Behaviour-Text, Cases and Games‖, Himalaya Publishing
1.
House, New Delhi, 2017,
Stephen P. Robbins, Timothy, A. Judge: ―Essentials of Organizational Behaviour‖
2.
Pearson,2017
Pareek Udai, Sushma Khanna: ―Understanding Organizational Behaviour‖, Oxford
3.
University Press, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Luthans, Fred: Organizational Behaviour 10/e, McGraw-Hill, 2015
‗Steven L McShane, Mary Ann Von Glinow, Radha R Sharma: ―Organizational
2.
Behavior‖, Tata McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2017.
Jerald Greenberg and Robert A Baron: ―Behavior in Organizations‖, PHI Learning Private
3
Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
Jai B.P.Sinha: ―Culture and Organizational Behavior‖, Sage Publication India Private
4
Limited, New Delhi, 2009.
New strom W. John& Davis Keith, Organisational Behaviour--Human Behaviour at Work,
5
12/e, TMH, New Delhi, 2009.
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.diversityresources.com/cultural-diversity-workplace/
2 https://www.chanty.com/blog/problem-solving-techniques/
https://www.simplypsychology.org/perspective.html#:~:text=The%20five%20major%20pe
3
rspectives%20in,%2C%20behavioral%2C%20cognitive%20and%20humanistic
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water Resource Engineering
(Open Elective)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20CE7T13
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce hydrologic cycle and its relevance to Civil engineering.
Make the students understand physical processes in hydrology and, components of the
2
hydrologic cycle.
3 Appreciate concepts and theory of physical processes and interactions.
4 Learn measurement and estimation of the components hydrologic cycle.
5 Provide an overview and understanding of Unit Hydrograph theory and its analysis.
6 Understand flood frequency analysis, design flood, flood routing.
7 Appreciate the concepts of groundwater movement and well hydraulics
8 Learn overview of flood routing and its effects.
9 Has to be understood and identify the flood occurring areas nearby.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Explain the theories and principles governing the hydrologic processes
CO1 K1
and list out the forms of precipitation in real conditions.
Apply key concepts to several practical areas of engineering hydrology
CO2 K5
and related design aspects.
CO3 Design major hydrologic components for a need-based structures. K3
CO4 Estimate flood magnitude and carry out flood routing. K5
CO5 Demonstrate the recuperation test process in open wells. K6
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1

COURSE CONTENT
INTRODUCTION: Engineering hydrology and its applications, Hydrologic cycle,
hydrological data-sources of data. Precipitation: Types and forms, measurement,
UNIT I rain gauge network, presentation of rainfall data, average rainfall, continuity and
consistency of rainfall data, Frequency of point rainfall, Rain fall data in India.
Intensity-Duration-Frequency (IDF) curves, Depth-Area Duration (DAD) curves,
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Probable Maximum Precipitation (PMP), design storm, problems on average
rainfall on towns
ABSTRACTIONS FROM PRECIPITATION: Introduction, Initial abstractions.
EVAPORATION: Factors affecting, measurement, reduction, Analytical methods
UNIT II of Evaporation estimation. EVAPOTRANSPIRATION: Factors affecting,
measurement, control, Potential Evapotranspiration over India. INFILTRATION:
Factors affecting, Infiltration capacity curve, measurement, Infiltration Indices.
Problems on ϕ-Index and W-Index.
RUNOFF: Catchment characteristics, Factors affecting runoff, components,
computation- empirical formulae, tables and curves, stream gauging, rating curve,
flow mass curve and flow duration curve. HYDROGRAPH ANALYSIS:
UNIT III Components of hydrograph, separation of base flow, effective rainfall hyetograph
and direct runoff hydrograph, unit hydrograph, assumptions, derivation of unit
hydrograph, unit hydrographs of different durations, principle of superposition and
S- hydrograph methods, limitations and applications of unit hydrograph, synthetic
unit hydrograph. Problems on unit hydrograph.
FLOODS: Causes and effects, frequency analysis - Gumbel‘s and Log-Pearson type
III distribution methods, Standard Project Flood (SPF) and Probable Maximum
Flood (MPF), flood control methods and management, Design flood, Design storm.
UNIT IV FLOOD ROUTING: Hydrologic storage routing, channel and reservoir routing-
Muskingum and Puls methods of routing, flood control in India. ADVANCED
TOPICS IN HYDROLOGY: Rainfall-Runoff Modelling, Instantaneous Unit
Hydrograph (IUH) - Conceptual models - Clark and Nash models, general
hydrological models- Chow - Kulandaiswamy model.
GROUNDWATER: Occurrence, types of aquifers, aquifer parameters, porosity,
UNIT V specific yield, specific capacity, permeability, transitivity and storage coefficient,
types of wells, well loss, Darcy‘s law, Dupuit‘s equation- steady radial flow to
wells in confined and unconfined aquifers, yield of a open well-recuperation test.

TEXT BOOKS
Engineering Hydrology‟ by Subramanya, K, Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
1.
(2013), NewDelhi.
Engineering Hydrology‟ by Jayarami Reddy, P, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., (2013), New
2.
Delhi.
―Irrigation and Water Power Engineering‖ by Punmia B C, P.B.B Lal, A.K. Jainand A.K.
3
Jain (2009), Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Water Resources Engineering‘ Mays L.W, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, (2013).
2. ‗Hydrology‘ by Raghunath. H.M. New Age International Publishers,(2010).
‗Engineering Hydrology –Principles and Practice‘ by Ponce V.M., Prentice Hall
3
International,(1994).
4 ‗Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering‘ by Patra K.C., Narosa Publications,(2011).
‗Applied hydrology‘ by Chow V.T., D.R Maidment and L.W. Mays, Tata McGraw Hill
5
Education Pvt.Ltd., Transportation Engineering-Id., (2011), NewDelhi.
‗Engineering Hydrology‘ by Ojha C.S.P, R. Berndtsson and P. Bhunya, Oxford University
6
Press,(2010).
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Smart Grid Technologies
(Open Elective – IV offered to other departments)
Course Category Professional Core Course Code 20EE7T30
Courses
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites NIL Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To understand the basic concepts of smart grid.
2 To understand various smart grid technologies and its usage in smart applications.
To realize substation automation with intelligent sensors and have an idea on battery
3
energy storage systems.
4 To have basic knowledge on micro grids and DG‘s.
5 To have an idea on communication technologies used in smart grid.

COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: Cognitive Level
Know the concepts of smart grids and analyze the smart grid
CO1 K2
policies and developments in smart grids.
Analyze the concepts of smart grid technologies in hybrid
CO2 K4
electrical vehicles etc.
Know the concepts of smart substations - feeder automation -
CO3 K2
Battery Energy storage systems etc.
CO4 Analyze micro grids and distributed generation systems. K4
Analyze the effect of power quality in smart grid and to
CO5 K4
understand latest developments in ICT for smart grid.
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create

Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program

Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 2 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Smart Grid
Evolution of Electric Grid - Concept of Smart Grid - Definitions - Need of Smart
UNIT 1 Grid - Functions of Smart Grid - Opportunities & Barriers of Smart Grid -
Difference between conventional & smart grid - Concept of Resilient & Self-
Healing Grid - Present development & International policies on Smart Grid.
Smart Grid Technologies-1
Introduction to Smart Meters - Real Time Pricing - Smart Appliances - Automatic
UNIT 2 Meter Reading(AMR) - Outage Management System(OMS) - Plug in Hybrid
Electric Vehicles(PHEV) - Vehicle to Grid - Smart Sensors - Home & Building
Automation - Phase Shifting Transformers - Net Metering.
Smart Grid Technologies- 2
Smart Substations - Substation Automation - Feeder Automation. Geographic
Information System(GIS) - Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) & their application
UNIT 3 for monitoring & protection.
Smart storage like Battery Energy Storage Systems (BESS) - Super Conducting
Magnetic Energy Storage Systems (SMES) - Pumped Hydro - Compressed Air
Energy Storage (CAES)
Micro grids and Distributed Energy Resources
Concept of micro grid - need & applications of microgrid - formation of microgrid -
UNIT 4
Issues of interconnection - protection & control of microgrid - Integration of
renewable energy sources - Demand Response.
UNIT 5 Information and Communication Technology for Smart Grid
Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) - Home Area Network (HAN) -
Neighborhood Area Network (NAN) - Wide Area Network (WAN).

TEXT BOOKS
1 Integration of Green and Renewable Energy in Electric Power Systems - by Ali Keyhani -
Mohammad N. Marwali - Min Dai Wiley - 2009.
2 The Smart Grid: Enabling Energy Efficiency and Demand Response - by Clark
W.Gellings - Fairmont Press - 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 The Advanced Smart Grid: Edge Power Driving Sustainability:1 by Andres Carvallo -
John Cooper - Artech House Publishers July 2011
2 Control and Automation of Electric Power Distribution Systems (Power Engineering) by
James Northcote - Green - Robert G. Wilson - CRC Press - 2017.
3 Substation Automation (Power Electronics and Power Systems) by MladenKezunovic -
Mark G. Adamiak - Alexander P. Apostolov - Jeffrey George Gilbert - Springer - 2010.
4 Electrical Power System Quality by R. C. Dugan - Mark F. McGranghan - Surya Santoso
-H. Wayne Beaty - McGraw Hill Publication - 2nd Edition.
WEB RESOURCES (Suggested)
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108107113
2 https://electrical-engineering-portal.com/smart-grid-concept-and-characteristics
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sustainable Energy Technologies
(Open Elective)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Open Elective Course Code 20ME7T38
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To demonstrate the importance and solar radiation, solar energy collection and storage
To understand the energy sources and potential from wind energy, bio-mass, geothermal
2
energy and ocean energy
3 To interpret energy efficient electrical and mechanical systems
4 To develop energy efficient processes
5 To understand features and benefits of green buildings

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Illustrate the importance and solar radiation, solar energy collection and
CO1 K2
storage.
Understand the energy sources and potential from wind energy, bio-
CO2 K2
mass, geothermal energy and ocean energy.
CO3 Analyze energy efficient electrical and mechanical systems. K2
CO4 Understand features and benefits of green buildings. K2
Understand the different types of unconventional machining methods and
CO5 K2
principles of finishing processes.

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - - 2
CO2 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - - 2
CO3 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - - 2
CO4 3 2 3 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - - 2
CO5 3 2 3 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - - 2

COURSE CONTENT
SOLAR RADIATION: Role and potential of new and renewable sources, the solar
energy option, Environmental impact of solar power, structure of the sun, the solar
constant, sun-earth relationships, coordinate systems and coordinates of the sun,
UNIT I extraterrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation, solar radiation on titled surface,
instruments for measuring solar radiation and sun shine, solar radiation data,
numerical problems. Photo voltaic energy conversion – types of PV cells.
SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTION: Flat plate and concentrating collectors,
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
classification of concentrating collectors, orientation.
SOLAR ENERGY STORAGE AND APPLICATIONS: Different methods,
sensible, latent heat and stratified storage, solar ponds, solar applications- solar
heating/cooling technique, solar distillation and drying, solar cookers, central power
tower concept and solar chimney.
WIND ENERGY: Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills,
performance characteristics, betz criteria, types of winds, wind data measurement.
BIO-MASS: Principles of bio-conversion, anaerobic/aerobic digestion, types of
bio-gas digesters, gas yield, utilization for cooking, bio fuels, I.C. engine operation
UNIT II and economic aspects.
GEOTHERMAL ENERGY: Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the
energy.
OCEAN ENERGY: OTEC, Principles of utilization, setting of OTEC plants,
thermodynamic cycles. Tidal and wave energy: Potential and conversion
techniques.
ENERGY EFFICIENT SYSTEMS:
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Energy efficient motors, energy efficient lighting and
control, selection of luminaire, variable voltage variable frequency drives
UNIT III (adjustable speed drives), controls for HVAC (heating, ventilation and air
conditioning), demand site management.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Fuel cells- principle, thermodynamic aspects,
selection of fuels & working of various types of fuel cells, environmentally friendly
and Energy efficient compressors and pumps.
ENERGY EFFICIENT PROCESSES: Environmental impact of the current
manufacturing practices and systems, benefits of green manufacturing systems,
UNIT IV selection of recyclable and environment friendly materials in manufacturing, design
and implementation of efficient and sustainable green production systems with
examples like environmentally friendly machining, vegetable based cutting fluids,
alternate casting and joining techniques, zero waste manufacturing..
GREEN BUILDINGS: Definition, features and benefits. Sustainable site selection
and planning of buildings for maximum comfort. Environmentally friendly building
UNIT V materials like bamboo, timber, rammed earth, hollow blocks, lime & lime
pozzolana cement, agro materials and industrial waste, Ferro cement and Ferro-
concrete, alternate roofing systems, paints to reduce heat gain of the buildings.
Energy management.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Solar Energy – Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage/Sukhatme S.P. and J.K.Nayak/TMH
2. Non-Conventional Energy Resources- Khan B.H/ Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2006
3 Green Manufacturing Processes and Systems - J. Paulo Davim/Springer 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
Alternative Building Materials and Technologies - K.S Jagadeesh, B.V Venkata Rama
1.
Reddy and K.S Nanjunda Rao/New age international
‗Principles of Solar Engineering - D.YogiGoswami, Frank Krieth & John F Kreider/Taylor
2.
& Francis
3 Non-Conventional Energy - Ashok V Desai /New Age International (P) Ltd
4 Renewable Energy Technologies -Ramesh & Kumar /Narosa
5 Non conventional Energy Source- G.D Roy/Standard Publishers
6 Renewable Energy Resources-2nd Edition/ J.Twidell and T. Weir/ BSP Books Pvt. Ltd
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY
Open Elective)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course
Professional Core Course Code 20IT6T10
Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3-0-0-3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The objective of the course is to
The main objectives of this course are to explore the working principles and utilities of
various cryptographic algorithms including secret key cryptography, hashes and message
1 digests, public key algorithms, design issues and working principles of various authentication
protocols and various secure communication standards including Kerberos, IPsec, and
SSL/TLS.
COURSE OUTCOMES Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to: level

Explain different security threats and countermeasures and

CO1 K1
foundation course of cryptography mathematics.
Classifythebasicprinciplesofsymmetrickeyalgorithmsandoperationsof
CO2 K2
somesymmetrickeyalgorithmsandasymmetrickeycryptography
RevisethebasicprinciplesofPublickeyalgorithmsandWorkingoperation
CO3 K2
sofsomeAsymmetrickeyalgorithmssuchasRSA,ECCandsomemore
Design applications of hash algorithms, digital signatures and key
CO4 K3
management techniques
DeterminetheknowledgeofApplicationlayer,TransportlayerandNetwo
CO5 K2
rklayersecurityProtocolssuchasPGP,S/MIME,SSL,TSL,andIPsec
K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program Outcomes
(1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 1
CO5 3 2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE CONTENT
Basic Principles: Security Goals, Cryptographic Attacks, Services and Mechanisms,
UNIT I
Mathematics of Cryptography.
Symmetric Encryption: Mathematics of Symmetric Key Cryptography, Introduction
UNIT II to Modern Symmetric Key Ciphers, Data Encryption Standard, Advanced Encryption
Standard.
Asymmetric Encryption: Mathematics of Asymmetric Key Cryptography,
UNIT III
Asymmetric Key Cryptography
Data Integrity, Digital Signature Schemes & Key Management: Message
UNIT IV Integrity and Message Authentication, Cryptographic Hash Functions, Digital
Signature, Key Management.
Network Security-I: Security at application layer: PGP and S/MIME, Security at
UNIT V the Transport Layer: SSL and TLS, Network Security-II : Security at the Network
Layer: IPSec, System Security
TEXT BOOKS
Cryptography and Network Security, 3rd Edition Behrouz A Forouzan, Deb deep
1.
Mukhopadhyay, McGraw Hill,2015
2. Cryptography and Network Security,4thEdition, William Stallings, (6e) Pearson,2006
3. Everyday Cryptography, 1stEdition, Keith M.Martin, Oxford,2016
REFERENCE BOOKS
Network Security and Cryptography, 1st Edition, Bernard Meneges, Cengage
1.
Learning,2018.
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Marketing Management
(Open Elective)
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course
Open Elective Course Code 20HM7T04
Category
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Humanities including
Semester End Examination 70
Management
Total Marks 100

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the concepts of Marketing and Marketing Environment. K2
Analyze the consumer behavior and market segmentation in order to
CO2 maintain better consumer relations and product positioning K3
respectively.

CO3 Make use of strategies and make decisions based on product life cycle K4
and product mix concepts.

CO4 Understand the pricing effects and select a better distribution channel K2
to reach the consumer.
CO5 Understand the promotional methods and importance. K2

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO3 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Marketing: Market and Marketing, Functions, importance and
UNIT I problems of marketing – Marketing Environment, Approaches to the study of
marketing – Institutional Approach, Commodity approach, Management approach,
systems approach to marketing. Marketing Mix(7 p‘s of Marketing.)
Consumer Behavior and CRM
Meaning and features and Factors influencing Consumer Behavior – Theories of
Buying Behavior (Economic theories – Marshallion model, psychological theories,
UNIT II psycho-analytic theories, socio-cultural theories) – buying decision process -
Customer Relationship Management.
Market Segmentation
Market Segmentation – Bases of Segmenting Consumer Market and Industrial
Market – Target Marketing – Product differentiation – Product Positioning.
Product decision: New product development – Product mix – management of
UNIT III product life cycle – product strategies – product additions and deletions.

Branding, packaging and labeling – product differentiation – planned obsolescence.

Pricing: Pricing objectives – Pricing methods – Pricing strategies.
UNIT IV Channels of Distribution: Nature and types of marketing channels – wholesale
distribution- retail distribution – direct marketing – selection of channels, Logistics,
Third Party Service providers..
Promotion : Nature and Importance of promotion – promotional methods of
UNIT V personal selling : objectives and function, Advertising objectives – Message content
– media selection – Advertising agency – Advertising Budgets – Measuring
Advertising effectiveness; Sales promotion Techniques – Social Media Promotion

TEXT BOOKS
1. Phil T.Kotler –Marketing Management - Pearson Education limited – 2019
2. S.A.Sherlekar – Marketing Management - Himalaya Publishing House - 2019
3 Dr. K.Karunakaran – Marketing Management Himalaya Publishing House – 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Priyanka Goel - Marketing Management – Atlantic publications - 2019.
2. Philip Kotler and Lane Keller - Marketing Management – Pearson Educaion ltd - 2017
3 L.Natarajan – Marketing Management – Margham Publications - 2012
WEB RESOURCES
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/marketing_management/marketing_management_function
1.
s
2 https://keydifferences.com/difference-between-branding-and-packaging.html
3 https://smallbusiness.chron.com/product-mix-639.html
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Universal Human Values-II Understanding Harmony
IV B. Tech I Semester
Course Category Humanities Science Course Code 20HM7T11
Course Type Theory L-T-P-C 3- 0- 0 - 3
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 30
Semester End Examination 70
Total Marks 100

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
Understand the significance of value inputs in a classroom and start K2
CO1
applying them in their life and profession
Distinguish between values and skills, happiness and accumulation of K1
CO2 physical facilities, the Self and the Body, Intention and Competence of
an individual, etc.
Understand the role of a human being in ensuring harmony in society K2
CO3
and nature.
Distinguish between ethical and unethical practices, and start working K1
CO4 out the strategy to actualize a harmonious environment wherever they
work.
Understand the current scenario in Technology with respect to the K2
CO5
Professional Ethics

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

COURSE CONTENT
Introduction to Value Education: Value Education, Definition, Concept and
UNIT I Need for Value Education, Content and Process of Value Education, Basic
Guidelines for Value Education, Self exploration as a means of Value Education,
Happiness and Prosperity as parts of Value Education..
Harmony in the Human Being: Human Being is more than just the Body,
UNIT II Harmony of the Self (‗I‘) with the Body, Understanding Myself as Co-existence of
the Self and the Body, Understanding Needs of the Self and the needs of the Body,
Understanding the activities in the Self and the activities in the Body.
Harmony in the Family and Society and Harmony in the Nature: Family as a
basic unit of Human Interaction and Values in Relationships, The Basics for
UNIT III Respect and today‘s Crisis: Affection, Guidance, Reverence, Glory, Gratitude and
Love. Comprehensive Human Goal: The Five Dimensions of Human Endeavour,
Harmony in Nature: The Four Orders in Nature, The Holistic Perception of
Harmony in Existence..
Social Ethics:The Basics for Ethical Human Conduct, Defects in Ethical Human
UNIT IV Conduct, Holistic Alternative and Universal Order, Universal Human Order and
Ethical Conduct, Human Rights violation and Social Disparities..
Professional Ethics: Value based Life and Profession, Professional Ethics and
UNIT V Right Understanding, Competence in Professional Ethics, Issues in Professional
Ethics – The Current Scenario, Vision for Holistic Technologies, Production
System and Management Models.

TEXT BOOKS
1. A.N Tripathy, New Age International Publishers, 2003.
2. Bajpai. B. L , , New Royal Book Co, Lucknow, Reprinted, 2004
3 Bertrand Russell Human Society in Ethics & Politics
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Corliss Lamont, Philosophy of Humanism
Gaur. R.R. , Sangal. R, Bagaria. G.P, A Foundation Course in Value Education, Excel
2.
Books, 2009.
3 Gaur. R.R. , Sangal. R , Bagaria. G.P, Teachers Manual Excel Books, 2009.
4 .I.C. Sharma . Ethical Philosophy of India Nagin & co Julundhar
5 Mortimer. J. Adler, – Whatman has made of man
6 William Lilly Introduction to Ethic Allied Publisher
WEB RESOURCES
https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.2753/RSP1061-
1.
1967330482?journalCode=mrsp20
https://www.thefbcg.com/resource/building-family-harmony-starts-with-living-our-
2 values/#:~:text=What%20does%20family%20harmony%20mean,family%20as%20a%20la
rger%20unit
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Designer Tools
(HFSS, Microwave Studio CST. Cadence Virtuoso. Synopsys, Mentor Graphics Xilinx)
IV B. Tech I Semester

Course Category SOC Course Code 20EC7S04

Course Type L-T-P-C 1- 0- 2 - 2
Prerequisites Internal Assessment 15
Semester End Examination 35
Total Marks 50

COURSE OUTCOMES
Cognitive
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
Level
CO1 Understand the usage of different high end EDA tools K3
CO2 Program and experiment analog and digital based real time problems K4
CO3 Solve problem related to advanced areas K5

K1: Remember, K2: Understand, K3: Apply, K4: Analyze, K5: Evaluate, K6: Create.
Contribution of Course Outcomes towards achievement of Program
Outcomes (1 – Low, 2 - Medium, 3 – High)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PS01 PS02
CO1 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 1 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 1 1 2
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, PEC R20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------